bfd:
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3 @c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
4 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
6 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/tc-*.c
10 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11 @c in config/obj-*.c
12 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13 @c %**start of header
14 @setfilename as.info
15 @c ---config---
16 @macro gcctabopt{body}
17 @code{\body\}
18 @end macro
19 @c defaults, config file may override:
20 @set have-stabs
21 @c ---
22 @c man begin NAME
23 @c ---
24 @include asconfig.texi
25 @include bfdver.texi
26 @c ---
27 @c man end
28 @c ---
29 @c common OR combinations of conditions
30 @ifset COFF
31 @set COFF-ELF
32 @end ifset
33 @ifset ELF
34 @set COFF-ELF
35 @end ifset
36 @ifset AOUT
37 @set aout-bout
38 @end ifset
39 @ifset ARM/Thumb
40 @set ARM
41 @end ifset
42 @ifset Blackfin
43 @set Blackfin
44 @end ifset
45 @ifset BOUT
46 @set aout-bout
47 @end ifset
48 @ifset H8/300
49 @set H8
50 @end ifset
51 @ifset SH
52 @set H8
53 @end ifset
54 @ifset HPPA
55 @set abnormal-separator
56 @end ifset
57 @c ------------
58 @ifset GENERIC
59 @settitle Using @value{AS}
60 @end ifset
61 @ifclear GENERIC
62 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
63 @end ifclear
64 @setchapternewpage odd
65 @c %**end of header
66
67 @c @smallbook
68 @c @set SMALL
69 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
70 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
71 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
72 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
73 @c
74 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
75 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
76 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
77 @c break.
78 @c
79 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
80 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
81 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
82 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
83 @c discretion, of course.
84 @ifinfo
85 @set SMALL
86 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
87 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
88 @end ifinfo
89
90 @ifnottex
91 @dircategory Software development
92 @direntry
93 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
94 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
95 @end direntry
96 @end ifnottex
97
98 @finalout
99 @syncodeindex ky cp
100
101 @copying
102 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
103
104 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
106 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
107 Inc.
108
109 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
110 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
111 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
112 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
113 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
114 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
115
116 @c man end
117 @end copying
118
119 @titlepage
120 @title Using @value{AS}
121 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
122 @ifclear GENERIC
123 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
124 @end ifclear
125 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
126 @sp 1
127 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
128 @end ifset
129 @sp 1
130 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
131 @sp 1
132 @sp 13
133 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
134 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
135 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
136 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
137 distracting the boss while they got some work
138 done.
139 @sp 3
140 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
141 @page
142 @tex
143 {\parskip=0pt
144 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
145 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
146 }
147 %"boxit" macro for figures:
148 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
149 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
150 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
151 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
152 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
153 @end tex
154
155 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
156 Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
157 2000, 2001, 2002, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Free Software Foundation,
158 Inc.
159
160 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
161 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
162 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
163 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
164 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
165 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
166
167 @end titlepage
168 @contents
169
170 @ifnottex
171 @node Top
172 @top Using @value{AS}
173
174 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
175 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
176 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
177 @end ifset
178 version @value{VERSION}.
179 @ifclear GENERIC
180 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
181 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
182 @end ifclear
183
184 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
185 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
186 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
187
188 @menu
189 * Overview:: Overview
190 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
191 * Syntax:: Syntax
192 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
193 * Symbols:: Symbols
194 * Expressions:: Expressions
195 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
196 @ifset ELF
197 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
198 @end ifset
199 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
200 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
201 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
202 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
203 * AS Index:: AS Index
204 @end menu
205 @end ifnottex
206
207 @node Overview
208 @chapter Overview
209 @iftex
210 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
211 @ifclear GENERIC
212 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
213 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
214 @end ifclear
215 @end iftex
216
217 @cindex invocation summary
218 @cindex option summary
219 @cindex summary of options
220 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
221 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
222
223 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
224
225 @ignore
226 @c man begin SEEALSO
227 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
228 @c man end
229 @end ignore
230
231 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
232 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
233 @smallexample
234 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
235 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
236 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
237 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
238 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
239 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
240 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
241 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
242 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
243 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
244 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
245 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
251 @c Add an empty line for separation.
252 @ifset AARCH64
253
254 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
255 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
256 @end ifset
257 @ifset ALPHA
258
259 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
260 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
261 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
262 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
263 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
264 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
265 @end ifset
266 @ifset ARC
267
268 @emph{Target ARC options:}
269 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
270 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
271 @end ifset
272 @ifset ARM
273
274 @emph{Target ARM options:}
275 @c Don't document the deprecated options
276 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
277 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
278 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
279 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
280 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
281 [@b{-mthumb}]
282 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
283 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
284 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
285 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
286 @end ifset
287 @ifset Blackfin
288
289 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
290 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
291 [@b{-mfdpic}]
292 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
293 [@b{-mnopic}]
294 @end ifset
295 @ifset CRIS
296
297 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
298 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
299 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
300 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
301 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
302 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
303 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D10V
306
307 @emph{Target D10V options:}
308 [@b{-O}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset D30V
311
312 @emph{Target D30V options:}
313 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset EPIPHANY
316
317 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
318 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset H8
321
322 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
323 [-h-tick-hex]
324 @end ifset
325 @ifset HPPA
326 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
327 @end ifset
328 @ifset I80386
329
330 @emph{Target i386 options:}
331 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
332 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I960
335
336 @emph{Target i960 options:}
337 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
338 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
339 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
340 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
341 @end ifset
342 @ifset IA64
343
344 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
345 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
346 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
347 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
348 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
349 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
350 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
351 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset IP2K
354
355 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
356 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32C
359
360 @emph{Target M32C options:}
361 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
362 @end ifset
363 @ifset M32R
364
365 @emph{Target M32R options:}
366 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
367 @b{--W[n]p}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M680X0
370
371 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
372 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
373 @end ifset
374 @ifset M68HC11
375
376 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
377 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
378 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
379 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
380 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
381 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
382 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
383 @end ifset
384 @ifset MCORE
385
386 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
387 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
388 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MICROBLAZE
391 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
392 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset MIPS
395
396 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
397 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
398 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
399 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
400 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
401 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
402 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
403 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
404 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
405 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
406 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
407 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
408 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
409 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
410 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
411 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
412 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
413 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
414 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
415 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
416 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
417 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
418 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
419 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
420 @end ifset
421 @ifset MMIX
422
423 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
424 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
425 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
426 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
427 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
428 @end ifset
429 @ifset PDP11
430
431 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
432 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
433 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
434 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PJ
437
438 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
439 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset PPC
442
443 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
444 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
445 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
446 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
447 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
448 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
449 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mvle}|@b{-mcom}]
450 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}]
451 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
452 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
453 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
454 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
455 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
456 @end ifset
457 @ifset RX
458
459 @emph{Target RX options:}
460 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
461 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset S390
464
465 @emph{Target s390 options:}
466 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
467 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
468 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
469 @end ifset
470 @ifset SCORE
471
472 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
473 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
474 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
475 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
476 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
477 @end ifset
478 @ifset SPARC
479
480 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
481 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
482 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
483 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
484 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
485 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
486 @end ifset
487 @ifset TIC54X
488
489 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
490 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
491 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
492 @end ifset
493
494 @ifset TIC6X
495
496 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
497 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
498 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
499 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
500 @end ifset
501 @ifset TILEGX
502
503 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
504 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
505 @end ifset
506 @ifset TILEPRO
507 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
508 @end ifset
509
510 @ifset XTENSA
511
512 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
513 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
514 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
515 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
516 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
517 @end ifset
518
519 @ifset Z80
520
521 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
522 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
523 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
524 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
525 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
526 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
527 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
528 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
529 @end ifset
530
531 @ifset Z8000
532 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
533 @end ifset
534
535 @c man end
536 @end smallexample
537
538 @c man begin OPTIONS
539
540 @table @gcctabopt
541 @include at-file.texi
542
543 @item -a[cdghlmns]
544 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
545
546 @table @gcctabopt
547 @item -ac
548 omit false conditionals
549
550 @item -ad
551 omit debugging directives
552
553 @item -ag
554 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
555
556 @item -ah
557 include high-level source
558
559 @item -al
560 include assembly
561
562 @item -am
563 include macro expansions
564
565 @item -an
566 omit forms processing
567
568 @item -as
569 include symbols
570
571 @item =file
572 set the name of the listing file
573 @end table
574
575 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
576 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
577 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
578
579 @item --alternate
580 Begin in alternate macro mode.
581 @ifclear man
582 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
583 @end ifclear
584
585 @item --compress-debug-sections
586 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
587 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
588 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
589
590 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
591 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
592
593 @item -D
594 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
595 other assemblers.
596
597 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
598 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
599 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
600
601 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
602 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
603 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
604 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
605 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
606 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
607
608 @item -f
609 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
610 compiler output).
611
612 @item -g
613 @itemx --gen-debug
614 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
615 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
616 ECOFF or DWARF2.
617
618 @item --gstabs
619 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
620 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
621
622 @item --gstabs+
623 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
624 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
625 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
626 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
627 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
628
629 @item --gdwarf-2
630 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
631 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
632 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
633
634 @item --size-check=error
635 @itemx --size-check=warning
636 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
637
638 @item --help
639 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
640
641 @item --target-help
642 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
643
644 @item -I @var{dir}
645 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
646
647 @item -J
648 Don't warn about signed overflow.
649
650 @item -K
651 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
652 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
653 @end ifclear
654 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
655 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
656 @end ifset
657
658 @item -L
659 @itemx --keep-locals
660 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
661 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
662 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
663 @ifclear man
664 @xref{Symbol Names}.
665 @end ifclear
666
667 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
668 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
669 listing to @var{number}.
670
671 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
672 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
673 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
674
675 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
676 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
677 @var{number} bytes.
678
679 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
680 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
681 to @var{number} + 1.
682
683 @item -o @var{objfile}
684 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
685
686 @item -R
687 Fold the data section into the text section.
688
689 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
690 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
691 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
692 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
693 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
694 requirements at the expense of speed.
695
696 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
697 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
698 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
699 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
700
701 @item --statistics
702 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
703 assembly.
704
705 @item --strip-local-absolute
706 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
707
708 @item -v
709 @itemx -version
710 Print the @command{as} version.
711
712 @item --version
713 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
714
715 @item -W
716 @itemx --no-warn
717 Suppress warning messages.
718
719 @item --fatal-warnings
720 Treat warnings as errors.
721
722 @item --warn
723 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
724
725 @item -w
726 Ignored.
727
728 @item -x
729 Ignored.
730
731 @item -Z
732 Generate an object file even after errors.
733
734 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
735 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
736
737 @end table
738 @c man end
739
740 @ifset AARCH64
741
742 @ifclear man
743 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
744 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
745 @end ifclear
746
747 @ifset man
748 @c man begin OPTIONS
749 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
750 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
751 @c man end
752 @c man begin INCLUDE
753 @include c-aarch64.texi
754 @c ended inside the included file
755 @end ifset
756
757 @end ifset
758
759 @ifset ALPHA
760
761 @ifclear man
762 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
763 for an Alpha processor.
764 @end ifclear
765
766 @ifset man
767 @c man begin OPTIONS
768 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
769 processor.
770 @c man end
771 @c man begin INCLUDE
772 @include c-alpha.texi
773 @c ended inside the included file
774 @end ifset
775
776 @end ifset
777
778 @c man begin OPTIONS
779 @ifset ARC
780 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
781 an ARC processor.
782
783 @table @gcctabopt
784 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
785 This option selects the core processor variant.
786 @item -EB | -EL
787 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
788 @end table
789 @end ifset
790
791 @ifset ARM
792 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
793 processor family.
794
795 @table @gcctabopt
796 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
797 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
798 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
799 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
800 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
801 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
802 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
803 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
804 @item -mthumb
805 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
806 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
807 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
808 @item -EB | -EL
809 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
810 @item -mthumb-interwork
811 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
812 ARM code in mind.
813 @item -k
814 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
815 @end table
816 @end ifset
817 @c man end
818
819 @ifset Blackfin
820
821 @ifclear man
822 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
823 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
824 @end ifclear
825
826 @ifset man
827 @c man begin OPTIONS
828 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
829 the Blackfin processor family.
830 @c man end
831 @c man begin INCLUDE
832 @include c-bfin.texi
833 @c ended inside the included file
834 @end ifset
835
836 @end ifset
837
838 @c man begin OPTIONS
839 @ifset CRIS
840 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
841 @end ifset
842
843 @ifset D10V
844 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
845 a D10V processor.
846 @table @gcctabopt
847 @cindex D10V optimization
848 @cindex optimization, D10V
849 @item -O
850 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
851 @end table
852 @end ifset
853
854 @ifset D30V
855 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
856 processor.
857 @table @gcctabopt
858 @cindex D30V optimization
859 @cindex optimization, D30V
860 @item -O
861 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
862
863 @cindex D30V nops
864 @item -n
865 Warn when nops are generated.
866
867 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
868 @item -N
869 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
870 @end table
871 @end ifset
872 @c man end
873
874 @ifset EPIPHANY
875 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
876 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
877
878 @ifclear man
879 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
880 configured for an Epiphany processor.
881 @end ifclear
882
883 @ifset man
884 @c man begin OPTIONS
885 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
886 an Epiphany processor.
887 @c man end
888 @c man begin INCLUDE
889 @include c-epiphany.texi
890 @c ended inside the included file
891 @end ifset
892
893 @end ifset
894
895 @ifset I80386
896
897 @ifclear man
898 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
899 configured for an i386 processor.
900 @end ifclear
901
902 @ifset man
903 @c man begin OPTIONS
904 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
905 an i386 processor.
906 @c man end
907 @c man begin INCLUDE
908 @include c-i386.texi
909 @c ended inside the included file
910 @end ifset
911
912 @end ifset
913
914 @c man begin OPTIONS
915 @ifset I960
916 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
917 Intel 80960 processor.
918
919 @table @gcctabopt
920 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
921 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
922
923 @item -b
924 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
925
926 @item -no-relax
927 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
928 error if necessary.
929
930 @end table
931 @end ifset
932
933 @ifset IP2K
934 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
935 Ubicom IP2K series.
936
937 @table @gcctabopt
938
939 @item -mip2022ext
940 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
941
942 @item -mip2022
943 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
944 just the basic IP2022 ones.
945
946 @end table
947 @end ifset
948
949 @ifset M32C
950 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
951 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
952
953 @table @gcctabopt
954
955 @item -m32c
956 Assemble M32C instructions.
957
958 @item -m16c
959 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
960
961 @item -relax
962 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
963
964 @item -h-tick-hex
965 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
966
967 @end table
968 @end ifset
969
970 @ifset M32R
971 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
972 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
973
974 @table @gcctabopt
975
976 @item --m32rx
977 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
978 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
979
980 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
981 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
982 encountered.
983
984 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
985 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
986 encountered.
987
988 @end table
989 @end ifset
990
991 @ifset M680X0
992 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
993 Motorola 68000 series.
994
995 @table @gcctabopt
996
997 @item -l
998 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
999
1000 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1001 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1002 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1003 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1004 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1005
1006 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1007 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1008 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1009 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1010 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1011 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1012
1013 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1014 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1015 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1016
1017 @end table
1018 @end ifset
1019
1020 @ifset PDP11
1021
1022 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1023 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1024
1025 @table @gcctabopt
1026 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1027 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1028 default is @option{-mpic}.
1029
1030 @item -mall
1031 @itemx -mall-extensions
1032 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1033
1034 @item -mno-extensions
1035 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1036
1037 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1038 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1039
1040 @item -m@var{cpu}
1041 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1042 disable all other extensions.
1043
1044 @item -m@var{machine}
1045 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1046 model, and disable all other extensions.
1047 @end table
1048
1049 @end ifset
1050
1051 @ifset PJ
1052 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1053 a picoJava processor.
1054
1055 @table @gcctabopt
1056
1057 @cindex PJ endianness
1058 @cindex endianness, PJ
1059 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1060 @item -mb
1061 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1062
1063 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1064 @item -ml
1065 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1066
1067 @end table
1068 @end ifset
1069
1070 @ifset M68HC11
1071 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1072 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1073
1074 @table @gcctabopt
1075
1076 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1077 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1078 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1079
1080 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1081 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1082 XGATE address space.
1083
1084 @item -mshort
1085 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1086
1087 @item -mlong
1088 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1089
1090 @item -mshort-double
1091 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1092
1093 @item -mlong-double
1094 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1095
1096 @item --force-long-branches
1097 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1098 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1099 sub routine.
1100
1101 @item -S | --short-branches
1102 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1103 when the offset is out of range.
1104
1105 @item --strict-direct-mode
1106 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1107 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1108
1109 @item --print-insn-syntax
1110 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1111
1112 @item --print-opcodes
1113 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1114
1115 @item --generate-example
1116 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1117 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1118
1119 @end table
1120 @end ifset
1121
1122 @ifset SPARC
1123 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1124 for the SPARC architecture:
1125
1126 @table @gcctabopt
1127 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1128 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1129 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1130
1131 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1132 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1133
1134 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1135 UltraSPARC extensions.
1136
1137 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1138 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1139 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1140
1141 @item -bump
1142 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1143 @end table
1144 @end ifset
1145
1146 @ifset TIC54X
1147 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1148 architecture.
1149
1150 @table @gcctabopt
1151 @item -mfar-mode
1152 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1153 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1154 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1155 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1156 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1157 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1158 behaviour in the shell.
1159 @end table
1160 @end ifset
1161
1162 @ifset MIPS
1163 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1164 a @sc{mips} processor.
1165
1166 @table @gcctabopt
1167 @item -G @var{num}
1168 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1169 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1170 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1171
1172 @cindex MIPS endianness
1173 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1174 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1175 @item -EB
1176 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1177
1178 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1179 @item -EL
1180 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1181
1182 @cindex MIPS ISA
1183 @item -mips1
1184 @itemx -mips2
1185 @itemx -mips3
1186 @itemx -mips4
1187 @itemx -mips5
1188 @itemx -mips32
1189 @itemx -mips32r2
1190 @itemx -mips64
1191 @itemx -mips64r2
1192 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1193 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1194 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1195 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1196 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1197 @samp{-mips64r2}
1198 correspond to generic
1199 @samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1200 and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1201 ISA processors, respectively.
1202
1203 @item -march=@var{CPU}
1204 Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1205
1206 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1207 Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1208
1209 @item -mfix7000
1210 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1211 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1212 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1213
1214 @item -mdebug
1215 @itemx -no-mdebug
1216 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1217 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1218
1219 @item -mpdr
1220 @itemx -mno-pdr
1221 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1222
1223 @item -mgp32
1224 @itemx -mfp32
1225 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1226 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1227 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1228 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1229
1230 @item -mips16
1231 @itemx -no-mips16
1232 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1233 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1234 turns off this option.
1235
1236 @item -mmicromips
1237 @itemx -mno-micromips
1238 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1239 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1240 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1241 at the start of the assembly file.
1242
1243 @item -msmartmips
1244 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1245 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1246 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1247 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1248
1249 @item -mips3d
1250 @itemx -no-mips3d
1251 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1252 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1253 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1254
1255 @item -mdmx
1256 @itemx -no-mdmx
1257 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1258 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1259 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1260
1261 @item -mdsp
1262 @itemx -mno-dsp
1263 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1264 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1265 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1266
1267 @item -mdspr2
1268 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1269 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1270 This option implies -mdsp.
1271 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1272 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1273
1274 @item -mmt
1275 @itemx -mno-mt
1276 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1277 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1278 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1279
1280 @item -mmcu
1281 @itemx -mno-mcu
1282 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1283 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1284 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1285
1286 @item --construct-floats
1287 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1288 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1289 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1290 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1291 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1292 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1293
1294 @cindex emulation
1295 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1296 This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1297 for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1298 between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1299 debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1300 endianness. The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1301 @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1302 @samp{mipsbelf}. The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1303 of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1304 the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1305 in the name. Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1306 selection in any case.
1307
1308 This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1309 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1310 Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1311 @samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1312 the other format, if both are to be available. For example, the Irix 5
1313 configuration includes support for both.
1314
1315 Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1316 fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1317 more processors.
1318
1319 @item -nocpp
1320 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1321 the native tools.
1322
1323 @item --trap
1324 @itemx --no-trap
1325 @itemx --break
1326 @itemx --no-break
1327 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1328 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1329 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1330 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1331 break exception.
1332
1333 @item -n
1334 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1335 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1336 @end table
1337 @end ifset
1338
1339 @ifset MCORE
1340 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1341 an MCore processor.
1342
1343 @table @gcctabopt
1344 @item -jsri2bsr
1345 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1346 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1347 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1348
1349 @item -sifilter
1350 @itemx -nosifilter
1351 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1352 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1353
1354 @item -relax
1355 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1356
1357 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1358 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1359 can be assembled.
1360
1361 @item -EB
1362 Assemble for a big endian target.
1363
1364 @item -EL
1365 Assemble for a little endian target.
1366
1367 @end table
1368 @end ifset
1369
1370 @ifset MMIX
1371 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1372 @end ifset
1373
1374 @c man end
1375 @ifset PPC
1376
1377 @ifclear man
1378 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1379 for a PowerPC processor.
1380 @end ifclear
1381
1382 @ifset man
1383 @c man begin OPTIONS
1384 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1385 PowerPC processor.
1386 @c man end
1387 @c man begin INCLUDE
1388 @include c-ppc.texi
1389 @c ended inside the included file
1390 @end ifset
1391
1392 @end ifset
1393
1394 @c man begin OPTIONS
1395 @ifset RX
1396 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1397 @end ifset
1398
1399 @ifset S390
1400 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1401 processor family.
1402
1403 @table @gcctabopt
1404 @item -m31
1405 @itemx -m64
1406 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1407 @item -mesa
1408 @item -mzarch
1409 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1410 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1411 @item -march=@var{processor}
1412 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1413 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1414 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1415 @item -mregnames
1416 @itemx -mno-regnames
1417 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1418 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1419 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1420 but evaluates to zero.
1421 @end table
1422 @end ifset
1423 @c man end
1424
1425 @ifset TIC6X
1426
1427 @ifclear man
1428 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1429 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1430 @end ifclear
1431
1432 @ifset man
1433 @c man begin OPTIONS
1434 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1435 TMS320C6000 processor.
1436 @c man end
1437 @c man begin INCLUDE
1438 @include c-tic6x.texi
1439 @c ended inside the included file
1440 @end ifset
1441
1442 @end ifset
1443
1444 @ifset TILEGX
1445
1446 @ifclear man
1447 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1448 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1449 @end ifclear
1450
1451 @ifset man
1452 @c man begin OPTIONS
1453 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1454 processor.
1455 @c man end
1456 @c man begin INCLUDE
1457 @include c-tilegx.texi
1458 @c ended inside the included file
1459 @end ifset
1460
1461 @end ifset
1462
1463 @ifset XTENSA
1464
1465 @ifclear man
1466 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1467 for an Xtensa processor.
1468 @end ifclear
1469
1470 @ifset man
1471 @c man begin OPTIONS
1472 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1473 Xtensa processor.
1474 @c man end
1475 @c man begin INCLUDE
1476 @include c-xtensa.texi
1477 @c ended inside the included file
1478 @end ifset
1479
1480 @end ifset
1481
1482 @c man begin OPTIONS
1483
1484 @ifset Z80
1485 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1486 a Z80 family processor.
1487 @table @gcctabopt
1488 @item -z80
1489 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1490 @item -r800
1491 Assemble for R800 processor.
1492 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1493 @itemx -Wnud
1494 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1495 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1496 @itemx -Wnup
1497 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1498 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1499 @itemx -Wud
1500 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1501 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1502 @itemx -Wup
1503 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1504 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1505 @itemx -Fud
1506 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1507 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1508 @itemx -Fup
1509 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1510 @end table
1511 @end ifset
1512
1513 @c man end
1514
1515 @menu
1516 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1517 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1518 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1519 * Command Line:: Command Line
1520 * Input Files:: Input Files
1521 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1522 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1523 @end menu
1524
1525 @node Manual
1526 @section Structure of this Manual
1527
1528 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1529 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1530 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1531 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1532 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1533
1534 @ifclear GENERIC
1535 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1536 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1537 @end ifclear
1538 @ifset GENERIC
1539 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1540 various flavors of the assembler.
1541 @end ifset
1542
1543 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1544 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1545 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1546 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1547 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1548 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1549 particular architecture.
1550 @ifset GENERIC
1551 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1552 machine architecture manual for this information.
1553 @end ifset
1554 @ifclear GENERIC
1555 @ifset H8/300
1556 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1557 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1558 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1559 @end ifset
1560 @ifset SH
1561 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1562 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1563 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1564 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1565 @end ifset
1566 @ifset Z8000
1567 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1568 @end ifset
1569 @end ifclear
1570
1571 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1572 @ignore
1573 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1574 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1575 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1576 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1577 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1578 qualification.
1579
1580 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1581 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1582 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1583 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1584 @end ignore
1585
1586 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1587 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1588 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1589 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1590 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1591 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1592 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1593 @c directives).
1594
1595 @node GNU Assembler
1596 @section The GNU Assembler
1597
1598 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1599
1600 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1601 @ifclear GENERIC
1602 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1603 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1604 @end ifclear
1605 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1606 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1607 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1608 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1609 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1610
1611 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1612 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1613 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1614 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1615 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1616 machine would assemble.
1617 @ifset VAX
1618 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1619 @end ifset
1620 @ifset M680X0
1621 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1622 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1623 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1624 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1625 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1626 @end ifset
1627
1628 @c man end
1629
1630 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1631 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1632 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1633
1634 @node Object Formats
1635 @section Object File Formats
1636
1637 @cindex object file format
1638 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1639 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1640 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1641 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1642 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1643 @ifclear GENERIC
1644 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1645 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1646 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1647 @end ifclear
1648 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1649 @ifset I960
1650 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1651 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1652 @end ifset
1653 @ifset HPPA
1654 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1655 SOM or ELF format object files.
1656 @end ifset
1657 @end ifclear
1658
1659 @node Command Line
1660 @section Command Line
1661
1662 @cindex command line conventions
1663
1664 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1665 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1666 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1667 significant.
1668
1669 @cindex standard input, as input file
1670 @kindex --
1671 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1672 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1673
1674 @cindex options, command line
1675 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1676 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1677 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1678 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1679 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1680
1681 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1682 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1683 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1684 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1685
1686 @smallexample
1687 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1688 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1689 @end smallexample
1690
1691 @node Input Files
1692 @section Input Files
1693
1694 @cindex input
1695 @cindex source program
1696 @cindex files, input
1697 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1698 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1699 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1700 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1701
1702 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1703 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1704 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1705 order specified.
1706
1707 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1708 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1709 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1710 (The standard input is also a file.)
1711
1712 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1713 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1714 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1715 is taken to be an input file name.
1716
1717 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1718 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1719 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1720 to assemble.
1721
1722 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1723 in your command line.
1724
1725 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1726 file.
1727
1728 @c man end
1729
1730 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1731
1732 @cindex input file linenumbers
1733 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1734 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1735 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1736 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1737 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1738
1739 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1740 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1741
1742 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1743 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1744 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1745 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1746 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1747 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1748
1749 @node Object
1750 @section Output (Object) File
1751
1752 @cindex object file
1753 @cindex output file
1754 @kindex a.out
1755 @kindex .o
1756 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1757 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1758 is the object file. Its default name is
1759 @ifclear BOUT
1760 @code{a.out}.
1761 @end ifclear
1762 @ifset BOUT
1763 @ifset GENERIC
1764 @code{a.out}, or
1765 @end ifset
1766 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1767 @end ifset
1768 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1769 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1770 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1771 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1772 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1773
1774 @cindex linker
1775 @kindex ld
1776 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1777 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1778 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1779 information for the debugger.
1780
1781 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1782 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1783
1784 @node Errors
1785 @section Error and Warning Messages
1786
1787 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1788
1789 @cindex error messages
1790 @cindex warning messages
1791 @cindex messages from assembler
1792 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1793 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1794 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1795 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1796 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1797
1798 @c man end
1799
1800 @cindex format of warning messages
1801 Warning messages have the format
1802
1803 @smallexample
1804 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1805 @end smallexample
1806
1807 @noindent
1808 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1809 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1810 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1811 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1812 @ifset GENERIC
1813 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1814 @end ifset
1815 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1816 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1817 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1818 tradition).
1819
1820 @cindex format of error messages
1821 Error messages have the format
1822 @smallexample
1823 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1824 @end smallexample
1825 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1826 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1827 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1828
1829 @node Invoking
1830 @chapter Command-Line Options
1831
1832 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1833 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1834 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1835 for options specific
1836 @ifclear GENERIC
1837 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1838 @end ifclear
1839 @ifset GENERIC
1840 to particular machine architectures.
1841 @end ifset
1842
1843 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1844
1845 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1846 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1847 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1848 by commas. For example:
1849
1850 @smallexample
1851 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1852 @end smallexample
1853
1854 @noindent
1855 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1856 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1857 local symbols in the symbol table).
1858
1859 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1860 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1861 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1862 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1863 assembler.)
1864
1865 @c man end
1866
1867 @menu
1868 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1869 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1870 * D:: -D for compatibility
1871 * f:: -f to work faster
1872 * I:: -I for .include search path
1873 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1874 * K:: -K for compatibility
1875 @end ifclear
1876 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1877 * K:: -K for difference tables
1878 @end ifset
1879
1880 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1881 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1882 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1883 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1884 * o:: -o to name the object file
1885 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1886 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1887 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1888 * v:: -v to announce version
1889 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1890 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1891 @end menu
1892
1893 @node a
1894 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1895
1896 @kindex -a
1897 @kindex -ac
1898 @kindex -ad
1899 @kindex -ag
1900 @kindex -ah
1901 @kindex -al
1902 @kindex -an
1903 @kindex -as
1904 @cindex listings, enabling
1905 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1906
1907 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1908 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1909 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1910 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1911 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1912 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1913 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1914 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1915 also.
1916
1917 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1918 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1919
1920 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
1921 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1922 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1923 omitted from the listing.
1924
1925 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1926 listing.
1927
1928 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1929 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1930 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1931 @code{.sbttl}.
1932 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1933 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1934 listing-control directives have no effect.
1935
1936 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1937 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1938
1939 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1940 because it
1941 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1942 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1943 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1944 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
1945 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1946
1947 @node alternate
1948 @section @option{--alternate}
1949
1950 @kindex --alternate
1951 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1952
1953 @node D
1954 @section @option{-D}
1955
1956 @kindex -D
1957 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1958 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1959 @command{@value{AS}}.
1960
1961 @node f
1962 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1963
1964 @kindex -f
1965 @cindex trusted compiler
1966 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1967 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1968 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1969 and comment preprocessing on
1970 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
1971 ,Preprocessing}.
1972
1973 @quotation
1974 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1975 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1976 not work correctly.
1977 @end quotation
1978
1979 @node I
1980 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1981
1982 @kindex -I @var{path}
1983 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
1984 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
1985 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
1986 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1987 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1988 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
1989 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
1990 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1991 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1992 specified (left to right) on the command line.
1993
1994 @node K
1995 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1996
1997 @kindex -K
1998 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1999 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2000 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2001 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2002 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2003 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2004 alteration on other platforms.
2005 @end ifclear
2006
2007 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2008 @cindex difference tables, warning
2009 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2010 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2011 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2012 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2013 is done.
2014 @end ifset
2015
2016 @node L
2017 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2018
2019 @kindex -L
2020 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2021 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2022 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2023 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2024 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2025 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2026 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2027 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2028
2029 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2030 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2031 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2032
2033 @node listing
2034 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2035
2036 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2037 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2038 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2039 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2040 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2041 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2042 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2043 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2044
2045 @table @gcctabopt
2046 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2047 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2048 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2049 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2050 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2051
2052 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2053 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2054 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2055 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2056 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2057 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2058 switch is used the default is to one.
2059
2060 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2061 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2062 @cindex Width of source line output
2063 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2064 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2065 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2066
2067 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2068 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2069 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2070 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2071 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2072 @end table
2073
2074 @node M
2075 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2076
2077 @kindex -M
2078 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2079 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2080 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2081 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2082 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2083 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2084 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2085 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2086 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2087
2088 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2089 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2090 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2091 individually. These are:
2092
2093 @itemize @bullet
2094 @item global symbols in common section
2095
2096 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2097 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2098 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2099 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2100 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2101
2102 @item complex relocations
2103
2104 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2105 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2106 are not support by other object file formats.
2107
2108 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2109
2110 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2111 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2112 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2113 script.
2114
2115 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2116
2117 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2118 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2119
2120 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2121
2122 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2123 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2124 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2125 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2126 assigned within a linker script.
2127 @end itemize
2128
2129 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2130 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2131 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2132
2133 @itemize @bullet
2134
2135 @item EBCDIC strings
2136
2137 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2138
2139 @item packed binary coded decimal
2140
2141 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2142 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2143
2144 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2145
2146 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2147
2148 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2149
2150 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2151
2152 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2153
2154 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2155 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2156 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2157 these options serve no purpose.
2158
2159 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2160
2161 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2162 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2163 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2164
2165 @item other @code{OPT} options
2166
2167 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2168 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2169
2170 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2171
2172 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2173 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2174
2175 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2176
2177 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2178
2179 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2180
2181 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2182
2183 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2184
2185 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2186
2187 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2188
2189 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2190
2191 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2192
2193 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2194
2195 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2196
2197 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2198
2199 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2200
2201 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2202
2203 @end itemize
2204
2205 @node MD
2206 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2207
2208 @kindex --MD
2209 @cindex dependency tracking
2210 @cindex make rules
2211
2212 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2213 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2214 dependencies of the main source file.
2215
2216 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2217
2218 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2219
2220 @node o
2221 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2222
2223 @kindex -o
2224 @cindex naming object file
2225 @cindex object file name
2226 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2227 default it has the name
2228 @ifset GENERIC
2229 @ifset I960
2230 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2231 @end ifset
2232 @ifclear I960
2233 @file{a.out}.
2234 @end ifclear
2235 @end ifset
2236 @ifclear GENERIC
2237 @ifset I960
2238 @file{b.out}.
2239 @end ifset
2240 @ifclear I960
2241 @file{a.out}.
2242 @end ifclear
2243 @end ifclear
2244 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2245 object file a different name.
2246
2247 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2248 existing file of the same name.
2249
2250 @node R
2251 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2252
2253 @kindex -R
2254 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2255 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2256 @cindex joining text and data sections
2257 @cindex merging text and data sections
2258 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2259 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2260 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2261 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2262 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2263 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2264
2265 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2266 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2267 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2268 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2269
2270 @ifset COFF-ELF
2271 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2272 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2273 @samp{.data}.
2274 @end ifset
2275
2276 @ifset HPPA
2277 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2278 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2279 @end ifset
2280
2281 @node statistics
2282 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2283
2284 @kindex --statistics
2285 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2286 @cindex time, total for assembly
2287 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2288 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2289 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2290 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2291 seconds).
2292
2293 @node traditional-format
2294 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2295
2296 @kindex --traditional-format
2297 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2298 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2299 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2300
2301 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2302 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2303
2304 @node v
2305 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2306
2307 @kindex -v
2308 @kindex -version
2309 @cindex assembler version
2310 @cindex version of assembler
2311 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2312 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2313 command line.
2314
2315 @node W
2316 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2317
2318 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2319 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2320 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2321 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2322
2323 @kindex -W
2324 @kindex --no-warn
2325 @cindex suppressing warnings
2326 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2327 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2328 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2329 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2330 are still reported.
2331
2332 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2333 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2334 @cindex warnings, causing error
2335 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2336 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2337
2338 @kindex --warn
2339 @cindex warnings, switching on
2340 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2341 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2342
2343 @node Z
2344 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2345 @cindex object file, after errors
2346 @cindex errors, continuing after
2347 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2348 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2349 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2350 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2351 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2352 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2353
2354 @node Syntax
2355 @chapter Syntax
2356
2357 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2358 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2359 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2360 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2361 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2362 @ifclear VAX
2363 assembler.
2364 @end ifclear
2365 @ifset VAX
2366 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2367 @end ifset
2368
2369 @menu
2370 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2371 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2372 * Comments:: Comments
2373 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2374 * Statements:: Statements
2375 * Constants:: Constants
2376 @end menu
2377
2378 @node Preprocessing
2379 @section Preprocessing
2380
2381 @cindex preprocessing
2382 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2383 @itemize @bullet
2384 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2385 @item
2386 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2387 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2388 a single space.
2389
2390 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2391 @item
2392 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2393 appropriate number of newlines.
2394
2395 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2396 @item
2397 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2398 @end itemize
2399
2400 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2401 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2402 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2403 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2404 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2405 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2406 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2407
2408 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2409 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2410 preprocessed.
2411
2412 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2413 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2414 @kindex #NO_APP
2415 @kindex #APP
2416 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2417 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2418 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2419 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2420 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2421 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2422 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2423 and whitespace.
2424
2425 @node Whitespace
2426 @section Whitespace
2427
2428 @cindex whitespace
2429 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2430 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2431 people to read. Unless within character constants
2432 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2433 as exactly one space.
2434
2435 @node Comments
2436 @section Comments
2437
2438 @cindex comments
2439 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2440 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2441
2442 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2443 This means you may not nest these comments.
2444
2445 @smallexample
2446 /*
2447 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2448 is to use this sort of comment.
2449 */
2450
2451 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2452 @end smallexample
2453
2454 @cindex line comment character
2455 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2456 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2457 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2458 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2459 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2460 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2461 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2462 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2463
2464 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2465 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2466 to specify logical line numbers:
2467
2468 @kindex #
2469 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2470 @cindex logical line numbers
2471 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2472 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2473 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2474 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2475 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2476
2477 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2478 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2479
2480 @smallexample
2481 # This is an ordinary comment.
2482 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2483 # This is logical line # 36.
2484 @end smallexample
2485 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2486 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2487
2488 @node Symbol Intro
2489 @section Symbols
2490
2491 @cindex characters used in symbols
2492 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2493 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2494 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2495 @samp{_.$}.
2496 @end ifclear
2497 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2498 @ifclear GENERIC
2499 @ifset H8
2500 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2501 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2502 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2503 symbol names.)
2504 @end ifset
2505 @end ifclear
2506 @end ifset
2507 @ifset GENERIC
2508 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2509 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2510 @end ifset
2511 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2512 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2513 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2514 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2515 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2516 @cindex length of symbols
2517
2518 @node Statements
2519 @section Statements
2520
2521 @cindex statements, structure of
2522 @cindex line separator character
2523 @cindex statement separator character
2524
2525 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2526 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2527 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2528 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2529 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2530 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2531 exception: they do not end statements.
2532
2533 @cindex newline, required at file end
2534 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2535 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2536 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2537
2538 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2539
2540 @cindex instructions and directives
2541 @cindex directives and instructions
2542 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2543 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2544 @c 13feb91.
2545 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2546 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2547 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2548 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2549 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2550 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2551 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2552 @ifset GENERIC
2553 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2554 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2555 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2556 language.@refill
2557 @end ifset
2558
2559 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2560 @cindex label (@code{:})
2561 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2562 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2563 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2564
2565 @ifset HPPA
2566 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2567 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2568 only one label may be defined on each line.
2569 @end ifset
2570
2571 @smallexample
2572 label: .directive followed by something
2573 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2574 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2575 @end smallexample
2576
2577 @node Constants
2578 @section Constants
2579
2580 @cindex constants
2581 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2582 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2583 @smallexample
2584 @group
2585 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2586 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2587 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2588 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2589 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2590 @end group
2591 @end smallexample
2592
2593 @menu
2594 * Characters:: Character Constants
2595 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2596 @end menu
2597
2598 @node Characters
2599 @subsection Character Constants
2600
2601 @cindex character constants
2602 @cindex constants, character
2603 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2604 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2605 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2606 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2607 used in arithmetic expressions.
2608
2609 @menu
2610 * Strings:: Strings
2611 * Chars:: Characters
2612 @end menu
2613
2614 @node Strings
2615 @subsubsection Strings
2616
2617 @cindex string constants
2618 @cindex constants, string
2619 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2620 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2621 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2622 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2623 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2624 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2625 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2626 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2627
2628 @cindex escape codes, character
2629 @cindex character escape codes
2630 @table @kbd
2631 @c @item \a
2632 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2633 @c
2634 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2635 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2636 @item \b
2637 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2638
2639 @c @item \e
2640 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2641 @c
2642 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2643 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2644 @item \f
2645 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2646
2647 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2648 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2649 @item \n
2650 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2651
2652 @c @item \p
2653 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2654 @c
2655 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2656 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2657 @item \r
2658 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2659
2660 @c @item \s
2661 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2662 @c other assemblers.
2663 @c
2664 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2665 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2666 @item \t
2667 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2668
2669 @c @item \v
2670 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2671 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2672 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2673 @c
2674 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2675 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2676 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2677 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2678 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2679 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2680
2681 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2682 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2683 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2684 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2685 lower case @code{x} works.
2686
2687 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2688 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2689 @item \\
2690 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2691
2692 @c @item \'
2693 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2694 @c This is needed in single character literals
2695 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2696 @c a @samp{'}.
2697 @c
2698 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2699 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2700 @item \"
2701 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2702 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2703
2704 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2705 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2706 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2707 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2708 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2709 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2710 code and warns you of the fact.
2711 @end table
2712
2713 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2714 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2715 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2716 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2717 sequence.
2718
2719 @node Chars
2720 @subsubsection Characters
2721
2722 @cindex single character constant
2723 @cindex character, single
2724 @cindex constant, single character
2725 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2726 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2727 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2728 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2729 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2730 grave accent. A newline
2731 @ifclear GENERIC
2732 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2733 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2734 @end ifclear
2735 @ifset abnormal-separator
2736 @ifset H8
2737 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2738 Renesas SH)
2739 @end ifset
2740 @end ifset
2741 @end ifclear
2742 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2743 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2744 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2745 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2746 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2747
2748 @node Numbers
2749 @subsection Number Constants
2750
2751 @cindex constants, number
2752 @cindex number constants
2753 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2754 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2755 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2756 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2757 are floating point numbers, described below.
2758
2759 @menu
2760 * Integers:: Integers
2761 * Bignums:: Bignums
2762 * Flonums:: Flonums
2763 @ifclear GENERIC
2764 @ifset I960
2765 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2766 @end ifset
2767 @end ifclear
2768 @end menu
2769
2770 @node Integers
2771 @subsubsection Integers
2772 @cindex integers
2773 @cindex constants, integer
2774
2775 @cindex binary integers
2776 @cindex integers, binary
2777 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2778 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2779
2780 @cindex octal integers
2781 @cindex integers, octal
2782 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2783 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2784
2785 @cindex decimal integers
2786 @cindex integers, decimal
2787 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2788 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2789
2790 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2791 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2792 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2793 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2794
2795 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2796 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2797 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2798
2799 @node Bignums
2800 @subsubsection Bignums
2801
2802 @cindex bignums
2803 @cindex constants, bignum
2804 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2805 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2806 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2807 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2808
2809 @node Flonums
2810 @subsubsection Flonums
2811 @cindex flonums
2812 @cindex floating point numbers
2813 @cindex constants, floating point
2814
2815 @cindex precision, floating point
2816 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2817 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2818 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2819 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2820 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2821 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2822
2823 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2824 @itemize @bullet
2825 @item
2826 The digit @samp{0}.
2827 @ifset HPPA
2828 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2829 @end ifset
2830
2831 @item
2832 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2833 @ifset GENERIC
2834 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2835 @ignore
2836 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2837 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2838 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2839 @end ignore
2840
2841 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2842 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2843 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2844
2845 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2846 (in upper or lower case).
2847
2848 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2849 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2850
2851 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2852 @end ifset
2853 @ifclear GENERIC
2854 @ifset ARC
2855 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2856 @end ifset
2857 @ifset H8
2858 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2859 @end ifset
2860 @ifset HPPA
2861 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2862 @end ifset
2863 @ifset I960
2864 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2865 @end ifset
2866 @end ifclear
2867
2868 @item
2869 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2870
2871 @item
2872 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2873
2874 @item
2875 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2876 or more decimal digits.
2877
2878 @item
2879 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2880
2881 @itemize @bullet
2882 @item
2883 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2884 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2885 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2886 @item
2887 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2888 @item
2889 One or more decimal digits.
2890 @end itemize
2891
2892 @end itemize
2893
2894 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2895 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2896
2897 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2898 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2899 @command{@value{AS}}.
2900
2901 @ifclear GENERIC
2902 @ifset I960
2903 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2904 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2905 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2906 @node Bit Fields
2907 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2908
2909 @cindex bit fields
2910 @cindex constants, bit field
2911 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2912 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2913 @example
2914 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2915 @end example
2916 @noindent
2917 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2918 @var{value}.
2919
2920 The resulting number is then packed
2921 @ifset GENERIC
2922 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2923 (in host-dependent byte order)
2924 @end ifset
2925 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2926 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2927 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2928 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2929 least significant digits.@refill
2930
2931 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2932 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2933 @end ifset
2934 @end ifclear
2935
2936 @node Sections
2937 @chapter Sections and Relocation
2938 @cindex sections
2939 @cindex relocation
2940
2941 @menu
2942 * Secs Background:: Background
2943 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
2944 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
2945 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
2946 * bss:: bss Section
2947 @end menu
2948
2949 @node Secs Background
2950 @section Background
2951
2952 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2953 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2954 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2955
2956 @cindex linker, and assembler
2957 @cindex assembler, and linker
2958 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2959 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
2960 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2961 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2962 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
2963 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2964 sections.
2965
2966 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2967 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2968 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2969 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
2970 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
2971 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2972 the proper run-time addresses.
2973 @ifset H8
2974 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2975 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2976 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2977 @end ifset
2978
2979 @cindex standard assembler sections
2980 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2981 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2982 @dfn{bss} sections.
2983
2984 @ifset COFF-ELF
2985 @ifset GENERIC
2986 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2987 @end ifset
2988 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2989 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2990 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2991 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2992 @end ifset
2993
2994 @ifset HPPA
2995 @ifset GENERIC
2996 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2997 @end ifset
2998 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2999 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3000 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3001 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3002 assembler directives.
3003
3004 @ifset SOM
3005 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3006 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3007 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3008 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3009 @end ifset
3010 @end ifset
3011
3012 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3013 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3014
3015 @ifset HPPA
3016 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3017 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3018 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3019 @end ifset
3020
3021 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3022 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3023 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3024 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3025 file is mentioned:
3026 @itemize @bullet
3027 @item
3028 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3029 an address?
3030 @item
3031 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3032 @item
3033 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3034 @display
3035 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3036 @end display
3037 @item
3038 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3039 @end itemize
3040
3041 @cindex addresses, format of
3042 @cindex section-relative addressing
3043 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3044 @display
3045 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3046 @end display
3047 @noindent
3048 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3049 nature.
3050 @ifset SOM
3051 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3052 symbol-relative instead.)
3053 @end ifset
3054
3055 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3056 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3057
3058 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3059 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3060 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3061 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3062 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3063 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3064 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3065 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3066 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3067
3068 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3069 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3070 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3071 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3072 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3073 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3074 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3075
3076 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3077 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3078 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3079 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3080 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3081 data and bss sections.
3082
3083 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3084 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3085
3086 @node Ld Sections
3087 @section Linker Sections
3088 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3089
3090 @table @strong
3091
3092 @ifset COFF-ELF
3093 @cindex named sections
3094 @cindex sections, named
3095 @item named sections
3096 @end ifset
3097 @ifset aout-bout
3098 @cindex text section
3099 @cindex data section
3100 @itemx text section
3101 @itemx data section
3102 @end ifset
3103 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3104 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3105 true of another.
3106 @c @ifset aout-bout
3107 When the program is running, however, it is
3108 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3109 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3110 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3111 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3112 in the data section.
3113 @c @end ifset
3114
3115 @cindex bss section
3116 @item bss section
3117 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3118 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3119 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3120 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3121 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3122 those explicit zeros from object files.
3123
3124 @cindex absolute section
3125 @item absolute section
3126 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3127 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3128 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3129 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3130
3131 @cindex undefined section
3132 @item undefined section
3133 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3134 the preceding sections.
3135 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3136 @end table
3137
3138 @cindex relocation example
3139 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3140 @ifset COFF-ELF
3141 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3142 @end ifset
3143 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3144
3145 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3146 @ifnottex
3147 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3148 @smallexample
3149 +-----+----+--+
3150 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3151 +-----+----+--+
3152
3153 text data bss
3154 seg. seg. seg.
3155
3156 +---+---+---+
3157 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3158 +---+---+---+
3159
3160 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3161 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3162 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3163
3164 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3165 @end smallexample
3166 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3167 @end ifnottex
3168 @need 5000
3169 @tex
3170 \bigskip
3171 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3172 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3173 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3174
3175 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3176 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3177 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3178
3179 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3180 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3181 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3182 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3183 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3184
3185 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3186 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3187
3188 @end tex
3189 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3190
3191 @node As Sections
3192 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3193
3194 @cindex internal assembler sections
3195 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3196 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3197 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3198 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3199 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3200 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3201 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3202 section-relative address.
3203
3204 @table @b
3205 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3206 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3207 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3208 bug in the assembler.
3209
3210 @cindex expr (internal section)
3211 @item expr section
3212 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3213 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3214 it in the expr section.
3215 @c FIXME item debug
3216 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3217 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3218 @c FIXME item register
3219 @end table
3220
3221 @node Sub-Sections
3222 @section Sub-Sections
3223
3224 @cindex numbered subsections
3225 @cindex grouping data
3226 @ifset aout-bout
3227 Assembled bytes
3228 @ifset COFF-ELF
3229 conventionally
3230 @end ifset
3231 fall into two sections: text and data.
3232 @end ifset
3233 You may have separate groups of
3234 @ifset GENERIC
3235 data in named sections
3236 @end ifset
3237 @ifclear GENERIC
3238 @ifclear aout-bout
3239 data in named sections
3240 @end ifclear
3241 @ifset aout-bout
3242 text or data
3243 @end ifset
3244 @end ifclear
3245 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3246 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3247 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3248 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3249 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3250 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3251 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3252 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3253 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3254 constants being output.
3255
3256 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3257 goes in subsection number zero.
3258
3259 @ifset GENERIC
3260 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3261 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3262 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3263 @end ifset
3264 @ifclear GENERIC
3265 @ifset H8
3266 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3267 boundary (two bytes).
3268 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3269 @end ifset
3270 @ifset I960
3271 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3272 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3273 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3274 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3275 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3276 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3277 @end ifset
3278 @end ifclear
3279
3280 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3281 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3282 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3283 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3284 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3285 data subsections as a data section.
3286
3287 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3288 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3289 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3290 @ifset COFF
3291 @ifset GENERIC
3292 When generating COFF output, you
3293 @end ifset
3294 @ifclear GENERIC
3295 You
3296 @end ifclear
3297 can also use an extra subsection
3298 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3299 @var{expression}}.
3300 @end ifset
3301 @ifset ELF
3302 @ifset GENERIC
3303 When generating ELF output, you
3304 @end ifset
3305 @ifclear GENERIC
3306 You
3307 @end ifclear
3308 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3309 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3310 @end ifset
3311 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3312 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3313 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3314 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3315 @smallexample
3316 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3317 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3318 .text 1
3319 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3320 .data 0
3321 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3322 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3323 .text 0
3324 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3325 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3326 @end smallexample
3327
3328 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3329 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3330 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3331 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3332 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3333 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3334 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3335
3336 @node bss
3337 @section bss Section
3338
3339 @cindex bss section
3340 @cindex common variable storage
3341 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3342 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3343 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3344 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3345 section are zeroed bytes.
3346
3347 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3348 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3349
3350 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3351 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3352
3353 @ifset GENERIC
3354 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3355 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3356 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3357 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3358 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3359 @end ifset
3360
3361 @node Symbols
3362 @chapter Symbols
3363
3364 @cindex symbols
3365 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3366 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3367 to debug.
3368
3369 @quotation
3370 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3371 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3372 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3373 @end quotation
3374
3375 @menu
3376 * Labels:: Labels
3377 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3378 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3379 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3380 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3381 @end menu
3382
3383 @node Labels
3384 @section Labels
3385
3386 @cindex labels
3387 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3388 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3389 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3390 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3391 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3392 definitions.
3393
3394 @ifset HPPA
3395 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3396 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3397 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3398 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3399 @end ifset
3400
3401 @node Setting Symbols
3402 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3403
3404 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3405 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3406 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3407 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3408 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3409 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3410 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3411 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3412
3413 @ifset Blackfin
3414 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3415 @end ifset
3416
3417 @node Symbol Names
3418 @section Symbol Names
3419
3420 @cindex symbol names
3421 @cindex names, symbol
3422 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3423 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3424 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3425 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3426 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3427 particular target machine), and underscores.
3428 @end ifclear
3429 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3430 @ifset H8
3431 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3432 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3433 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3434 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3435 @end ifset
3436 @end ifset
3437
3438 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3439 than @code{Foo}.
3440
3441 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3442 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3443 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3444 currently supported.
3445
3446 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3447 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3448 in a program.
3449
3450 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3451
3452 @cindex local symbol names
3453 @cindex symbol names, local
3454 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3455 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3456 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3457 set of local label prefixes.
3458 @ifset HPPA
3459 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3460 @end ifset
3461
3462 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3463 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3464 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3465 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3466
3467 @subheading Local Labels
3468
3469 @cindex local labels
3470 @cindex temporary symbol names
3471 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3472 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3473 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3474 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3475 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3476 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3477 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3478 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3479 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3480 for ``forwards''.
3481
3482 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3483 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3484 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3485 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3486 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3487 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3488 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3489
3490 Here is an example:
3491
3492 @smallexample
3493 1: branch 1f
3494 2: branch 1b
3495 1: branch 2f
3496 2: branch 1b
3497 @end smallexample
3498
3499 Which is the equivalent of:
3500
3501 @smallexample
3502 label_1: branch label_3
3503 label_2: branch label_1
3504 label_3: branch label_4
3505 label_4: branch label_3
3506 @end smallexample
3507
3508 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3509 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3510 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3511 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3512 these parts:
3513
3514 @table @code
3515 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3516 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3517 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3518 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3519 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3520 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3521 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3522 you may use them in debugging.
3523
3524 @item @var{number}
3525 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3526 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3527
3528 @item @kbd{C-B}
3529 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3530 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3531
3532 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3533 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3534 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3535 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3536 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3537 @end table
3538
3539 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3540 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3541
3542 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3543 @cindex dollar local symbols
3544
3545 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3546 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3547 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3548 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3549 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3550 the same local label.
3551
3552 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3553 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3554 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3555
3556 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3557 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3558 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3559 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3560
3561 @node Dot
3562 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3563
3564 @cindex dot (symbol)
3565 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3566 @cindex current address
3567 @cindex location counter
3568 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3569 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3570 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3571 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3572 directive.
3573 @ifclear no-space-dir
3574 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3575 @samp{.space 4}.
3576 @end ifclear
3577
3578 @node Symbol Attributes
3579 @section Symbol Attributes
3580
3581 @cindex symbol attributes
3582 @cindex attributes, symbol
3583 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3584 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3585 attributes.
3586 @ifset INTERNALS
3587 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3588 @end ifset
3589
3590 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3591 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3592 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3593 would want.
3594
3595 @menu
3596 * Symbol Value:: Value
3597 * Symbol Type:: Type
3598 @ifset aout-bout
3599 @ifset GENERIC
3600 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3601 @end ifset
3602 @ifclear GENERIC
3603 @ifclear BOUT
3604 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3605 @end ifclear
3606 @ifset BOUT
3607 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3608 @end ifset
3609 @end ifclear
3610 @end ifset
3611 @ifset COFF
3612 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3613 @end ifset
3614 @ifset SOM
3615 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3616 @end ifset
3617 @end menu
3618
3619 @node Symbol Value
3620 @subsection Value
3621
3622 @cindex value of a symbol
3623 @cindex symbol value
3624 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3625 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3626 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3627 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3628 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3629 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3630 called absolute.
3631
3632 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3633 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3634 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3635 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3636 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3637 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3638 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3639 allocated storage.
3640
3641 @node Symbol Type
3642 @subsection Type
3643
3644 @cindex type of a symbol
3645 @cindex symbol type
3646 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3647 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3648 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3649 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3650
3651 @ifset aout-bout
3652 @ifclear GENERIC
3653 @ifset BOUT
3654 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3655 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3656 @need 1000
3657 @node a.out Symbols
3658 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3659
3660 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3661 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3662 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3663 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3664 @code{b.out}.
3665
3666 @end ifset
3667 @ifclear BOUT
3668 @node a.out Symbols
3669 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3670
3671 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3672 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3673
3674 @end ifclear
3675 @end ifclear
3676 @ifset GENERIC
3677 @node a.out Symbols
3678 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3679
3680 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3681 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3682
3683 @end ifset
3684 @menu
3685 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3686 * Symbol Other:: Other
3687 @end menu
3688
3689 @node Symbol Desc
3690 @subsubsection Descriptor
3691
3692 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3693 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3694 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3695 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3696 @command{@value{AS}}.
3697
3698 @node Symbol Other
3699 @subsubsection Other
3700
3701 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3702 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3703 @end ifset
3704
3705 @ifset COFF
3706 @node COFF Symbols
3707 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3708
3709 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3710 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3711
3712 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3713 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3714 @code{.endef} directives.
3715
3716 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3717
3718 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3719 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3720 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3721
3722 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3723
3724 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3725 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3726 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3727 table information for COFF.
3728 @end ifset
3729
3730 @ifset SOM
3731 @node SOM Symbols
3732 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3733
3734 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3735 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3736
3737 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3738 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3739
3740 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3741 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3742 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3743 @end ifset
3744
3745 @node Expressions
3746 @chapter Expressions
3747
3748 @cindex expressions
3749 @cindex addresses
3750 @cindex numeric values
3751 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3752 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3753
3754 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3755 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3756 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3757 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3758 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3759 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3760
3761 @menu
3762 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3763 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3764 @end menu
3765
3766 @node Empty Exprs
3767 @section Empty Expressions
3768
3769 @cindex empty expressions
3770 @cindex expressions, empty
3771 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3772 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3773 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3774 is compatible with other assemblers.
3775
3776 @node Integer Exprs
3777 @section Integer Expressions
3778
3779 @cindex integer expressions
3780 @cindex expressions, integer
3781 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3782 by @emph{operators}.
3783
3784 @menu
3785 * Arguments:: Arguments
3786 * Operators:: Operators
3787 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3788 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3789 @end menu
3790
3791 @node Arguments
3792 @subsection Arguments
3793
3794 @cindex expression arguments
3795 @cindex arguments in expressions
3796 @cindex operands in expressions
3797 @cindex arithmetic operands
3798 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3799 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3800 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3801 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3802 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3803 instruction operands.
3804
3805 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3806 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3807 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3808 integer.
3809
3810 Numbers are usually integers.
3811
3812 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3813 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3814 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3815 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3816 assemblers.
3817
3818 @cindex subexpressions
3819 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3820 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3821 operator followed by an argument.
3822
3823 @node Operators
3824 @subsection Operators
3825
3826 @cindex operators, in expressions
3827 @cindex arithmetic functions
3828 @cindex functions, in expressions
3829 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3830 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3831 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3832 whitespace.
3833
3834 @node Prefix Ops
3835 @subsection Prefix Operator
3836
3837 @cindex prefix operators
3838 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3839 one argument, which must be absolute.
3840
3841 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3842 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3843 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3844 @tex
3845 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3846 @end tex
3847
3848 @table @code
3849 @item -
3850 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3851 @item ~
3852 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3853 @end table
3854
3855 @tex
3856 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3857 @end tex
3858
3859 @node Infix Ops
3860 @subsection Infix Operators
3861
3862 @cindex infix operators
3863 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3864 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3865 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3866 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3867 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3868
3869 @enumerate
3870 @cindex operator precedence
3871 @cindex precedence of operators
3872
3873 @item
3874 Highest Precedence
3875
3876 @table @code
3877 @item *
3878 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3879
3880 @item /
3881 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3882
3883 @item %
3884 @dfn{Remainder}.
3885
3886 @item <<
3887 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3888
3889 @item >>
3890 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3891 @end table
3892
3893 @item
3894 Intermediate precedence
3895
3896 @table @code
3897 @item |
3898
3899 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3900
3901 @item &
3902 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3903
3904 @item ^
3905 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3906
3907 @item !
3908 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3909 @end table
3910
3911 @item
3912 Low Precedence
3913
3914 @table @code
3915 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3916 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3917 @cindex arguments for addition
3918 @item +
3919 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3920 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
3921 sections.
3922
3923 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3924 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
3925 @cindex arguments for subtraction
3926 @item -
3927 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
3928 result has the section of the left argument.
3929 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3930 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3931 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3932
3933 @cindex comparison expressions
3934 @cindex expressions, comparison
3935 @item ==
3936 @dfn{Is Equal To}
3937 @item <>
3938 @itemx !=
3939 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3940 @item <
3941 @dfn{Is Less Than}
3942 @item >
3943 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
3944 @item >=
3945 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3946 @item <=
3947 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3948
3949 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
3950 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
3951 perform signed comparisons.
3952 @end table
3953
3954 @item Lowest Precedence
3955
3956 @table @code
3957 @item &&
3958 @dfn{Logical And}.
3959
3960 @item ||
3961 @dfn{Logical Or}.
3962
3963 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3964 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3965 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
3966 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3967
3968 @end table
3969 @end enumerate
3970
3971 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3972 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3973
3974 @node Pseudo Ops
3975 @chapter Assembler Directives
3976
3977 @cindex directives, machine independent
3978 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3979 @cindex machine independent directives
3980 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3981 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3982
3983 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3984 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3985 @ifset GENERIC
3986 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3987 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3988 @end ifset
3989 @ifclear GENERIC
3990 @ifset machine-directives
3991 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3992 @end ifset
3993 @end ifclear
3994
3995 @menu
3996 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
3997 @ifset COFF
3998 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
3999 @end ifset
4000
4001 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4002 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4003 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4004 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4005 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4006 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4007 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4008 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4009 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4010 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4011 @ifset COFF
4012 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4013 @end ifset
4014 @ifset aout-bout
4015 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4016 @end ifset
4017 @ifset COFF
4018 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4019 @end ifset
4020
4021 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4022 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4023 * Else:: @code{.else}
4024 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4025 * End:: @code{.end}
4026 @ifset COFF
4027 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4028 @end ifset
4029
4030 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4031 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4032 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4033 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4034 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4035 * Err:: @code{.err}
4036 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4037 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4038 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4039 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4040 * File:: @code{.file}
4041 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4042 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4043 * Func:: @code{.func}
4044 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4045 @ifset ELF
4046 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4047 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4048 @end ifset
4049
4050 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4051 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4052 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4053 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4054 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4055 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4056 @ifset ELF
4057 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4058 @end ifset
4059
4060 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4061 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4062 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4063 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4064 @ifclear no-line-dir
4065 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4066 @end ifclear
4067
4068 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4069 * List:: @code{.list}
4070 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4071 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4072 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4073 @ifset ELF
4074 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4075 @end ifset
4076
4077 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4078 @ignore
4079 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4080 @end ignore
4081
4082 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4083 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4084 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4085 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4086 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4087 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4088 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4089 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4090 @ifset ELF
4091 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4092 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4093 @end ifset
4094
4095 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4096 @ifset ELF
4097 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4098 @end ifset
4099
4100 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4101 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4102 @ifset ELF
4103 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4104 @end ifset
4105
4106 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4107 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4108 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4109 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4110 @ifset COFF
4111 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4112 @end ifset
4113 @ifset COFF-ELF
4114 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4115 @end ifset
4116
4117 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4118 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4119 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4120 @ifset COFF-ELF
4121 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4122 @end ifset
4123 @ifclear no-space-dir
4124 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4125 @end ifclear
4126
4127 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4128 @ifclear no-space-dir
4129 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4130 @end ifclear
4131 @ifset have-stabs
4132 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4133 @end ifset
4134
4135 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4136 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4137 @ifset ELF
4138 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4139 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4140 @end ifset
4141
4142 @ifset COFF
4143 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4144 @end ifset
4145
4146 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4147 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4148 @ifset COFF-ELF
4149 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4150 @end ifset
4151
4152 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4153 @ifset COFF
4154 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4155 @end ifset
4156
4157 @ifset ELF
4158 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4159 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4160 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4161 @end ifset
4162
4163 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4164 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4165 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4166 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4167 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4168 @end menu
4169
4170 @node Abort
4171 @section @code{.abort}
4172
4173 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4174 @cindex stopping the assembly
4175 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4176 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4177 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4178 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4179 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4180
4181 @ifset COFF
4182 @node ABORT (COFF)
4183 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4184
4185 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4186 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4187 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4188
4189 @ifset BOUT
4190 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4191 but ignores it.
4192 @end ifset
4193 @end ifset
4194
4195 @node Align
4196 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4197
4198 @cindex padding the location counter
4199 @cindex @code{align} directive
4200 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4201 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4202 required, as described below.
4203
4204 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4205 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4206 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4207 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4208 with no-op instructions.
4209
4210 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4211 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4212 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4213 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4214 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4215 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4216 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4217
4218 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4219 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4220 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4221 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4222 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4223 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4224 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4225
4226 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4227 strongarm, it is the
4228 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4229 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4230 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4231 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4232
4233 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4234 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4235 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4236 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4237 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4238
4239 @node Altmacro
4240 @section @code{.altmacro}
4241 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4242
4243 @ftable @code
4244 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4245 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4246 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4247 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4248 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4249 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4250 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4251
4252 @item String delimiters
4253 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4254 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4255
4256 @table @code
4257 @item '@var{string}'
4258 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4259
4260 @item <@var{string}>
4261 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4262 @end table
4263
4264 @item single-character string escape
4265 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4266 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4267 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4268 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4269
4270 @item Expression results as strings
4271 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4272 and use the result as a string.
4273 @end ftable
4274
4275 @node Ascii
4276 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4277
4278 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4279 @cindex string literals
4280 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4281 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4282 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4283
4284 @node Asciz
4285 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4286
4287 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4288 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4289 @cindex null-terminated strings
4290 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4291 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4292
4293 @node Balign
4294 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4295
4296 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4297 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4298 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4299 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4300 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4301 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4302 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4303
4304 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4305 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4306 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4307 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4308 with no-op instructions.
4309
4310 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4311 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4312 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4313 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4314 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4315 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4316 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4317
4318 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4319 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4320 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4321 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4322 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4323 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4324 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4325 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4326 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4327 undefined.
4328
4329 @node Bundle directives
4330 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4331 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4332 @cindex bundle
4333 @cindex instruction bundle
4334 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4335 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4336 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4337 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4338 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4339 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4340 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4341
4342 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4343 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4344 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4345 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4346 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4347 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4348 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4349 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4350 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4351 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4352 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4353
4354 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4355 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4356 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4357 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4358 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4359 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4360 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4361 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4362 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4363
4364 @cindex bundle-locked
4365 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4366 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4367 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4368 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4369 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4370 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4371 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4372 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4373 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4374 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4375 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4376 bundle size.
4377
4378 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4379 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4380 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4381 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4382 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4383 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4384
4385 @node Byte
4386 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4387
4388 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4389 @cindex integers, one byte
4390 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4391 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4392
4393 @node CFI directives
4394 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4395 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4396 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4397 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4398 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4399 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4400 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4401 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4402
4403 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4404 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4405 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4406 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4407 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4408 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4409
4410 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4411 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4412
4413 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4414 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4415 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4416 unwind entry previously opened by
4417 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4418
4419 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4420 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4421 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4422 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4423 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4424 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4425 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4426 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4427 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4428 no personality routine.
4429
4430 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4431 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4432 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4433 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4434 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4435 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4436 no LSDA.
4437
4438 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4439 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4440 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4441
4442 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4443 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4444 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4445 remains the same.
4446
4447 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4448 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4449 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4450 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4451 CFA address.
4452
4453 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4454 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4455 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4456
4457 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4458 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4459 CFA.
4460
4461 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4462 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4463 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4464 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4465 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4466 code it's annotating.
4467
4468 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4469 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4470
4471 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4472 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4473 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4474 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4475
4476 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4477 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4478
4479 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4480 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4481 i.e. no restoration needed.
4482
4483 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4484 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4485 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4486 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4487 the previous saved state.
4488
4489 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4490 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4491 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4492
4493 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4494 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4495
4496 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4497 SPARC register window has been saved.
4498
4499 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4500 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4501 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4502 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4503
4504 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4505 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4506 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4507 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4508
4509 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4510 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4511 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4512 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4513 or another register.
4514
4515 @node Comm
4516 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4517
4518 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4519 @cindex symbol, common
4520 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4521 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4522 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4523 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4524 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4525 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4526 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4527 using the largest size.
4528
4529 @ifset COFF-ELF
4530 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4531 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4532 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4533 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4534 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4535 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4536 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4537 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4538 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4539 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4540 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4541 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4542 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4543 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4544 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4545 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4546 @end ifset
4547
4548 @ifset HPPA
4549 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4550 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4551 @end ifset
4552
4553 @node Data
4554 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4555
4556 @cindex @code{data} directive
4557 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4558 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4559 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4560 to zero.
4561
4562 @ifset COFF
4563 @node Def
4564 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4565
4566 @cindex @code{def} directive
4567 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4568 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4569 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4570 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4571 @ifset BOUT
4572
4573 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4574 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4575 but ignored.
4576 @end ifset
4577 @end ifset
4578
4579 @ifset aout-bout
4580 @node Desc
4581 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4582
4583 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4584 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4585 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4586 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4587 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4588
4589 @ifset COFF
4590 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4591 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4592 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4593 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4594 @end ifset
4595 @end ifset
4596
4597 @ifset COFF
4598 @node Dim
4599 @section @code{.dim}
4600
4601 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4602 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4603 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4604 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4605 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4606 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4607 @ifset BOUT
4608
4609 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4610 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4611 ignores it.
4612 @end ifset
4613 @end ifset
4614
4615 @node Double
4616 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4617
4618 @cindex @code{double} directive
4619 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4620 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4621 assembles floating point numbers.
4622 @ifset GENERIC
4623 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4624 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4625 @end ifset
4626 @ifclear GENERIC
4627 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4628 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4629 in @sc{ieee} format.
4630 @end ifset
4631 @end ifclear
4632
4633 @node Eject
4634 @section @code{.eject}
4635
4636 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4637 @cindex new page, in listings
4638 @cindex page, in listings
4639 @cindex listing control: new page
4640 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4641
4642 @node Else
4643 @section @code{.else}
4644
4645 @cindex @code{else} directive
4646 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4647 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4648 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4649 was false.
4650
4651 @node Elseif
4652 @section @code{.elseif}
4653
4654 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4655 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4656 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4657 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4658
4659 @node End
4660 @section @code{.end}
4661
4662 @cindex @code{end} directive
4663 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4664 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4665
4666 @ifset COFF
4667 @node Endef
4668 @section @code{.endef}
4669
4670 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4671 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4672 @code{.def}.
4673 @ifset BOUT
4674
4675 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4676 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4677 directive but ignores it.
4678 @end ifset
4679 @end ifset
4680
4681 @node Endfunc
4682 @section @code{.endfunc}
4683 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4684 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4685
4686 @node Endif
4687 @section @code{.endif}
4688
4689 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4690 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4691 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4692 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4693
4694 @node Equ
4695 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4696
4697 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4698 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4699 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4700 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4701 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4702
4703 @ifset HPPA
4704 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4705 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4706 @end ifset
4707
4708 @ifset Z80
4709 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4710 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4711 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4712 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4713 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4714 @end ifset
4715
4716 @node Equiv
4717 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4718 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4719 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4720 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4721 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4722 undefined.
4723
4724 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4725 @smallexample
4726 .ifdef SYM
4727 .err
4728 .endif
4729 .equ SYM,VAL
4730 @end smallexample
4731 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4732
4733 @node Eqv
4734 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4735 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4736 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4737 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4738 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4739 value is taken.
4740
4741 @node Err
4742 @section @code{.err}
4743 @cindex @code{err} directive
4744 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4745 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4746 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4747
4748 @node Error
4749 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4750 @cindex error directive
4751
4752 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4753 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4754 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4755 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4756
4757 @smallexample
4758 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4759 @end smallexample
4760
4761 @node Exitm
4762 @section @code{.exitm}
4763 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4764
4765 @node Extern
4766 @section @code{.extern}
4767
4768 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4769 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4770 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4771 all undefined symbols as external.
4772
4773 @node Fail
4774 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4775
4776 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4777 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4778 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4779 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4780 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4781 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4782
4783 @node File
4784 @section @code{.file}
4785 @cindex @code{file} directive
4786
4787 @ifclear no-file-dir
4788 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4789 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4790 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4791
4792 @subheading Default Version
4793
4794 @cindex logical file name
4795 @cindex file name, logical
4796 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4797 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4798
4799 @smallexample
4800 .file @var{string}
4801 @end smallexample
4802
4803 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4804 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4805 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4806 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4807 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4808
4809 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4810 @end ifclear
4811
4812 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4813 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4814
4815 @smallexample
4816 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4817 @end smallexample
4818
4819 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4820 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4821 literal.
4822
4823 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4824 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4825 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4826 entries will have.
4827
4828 @node Fill
4829 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4830
4831 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4832 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4833 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4834 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4835 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4836 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4837 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4838 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4839 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4840 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4841 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4842 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4843 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4844 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4845
4846 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4847 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4848 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4849 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4850
4851 @node Float
4852 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4853
4854 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4855 @cindex @code{float} directive
4856 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4857 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4858 @ifset GENERIC
4859 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4860 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4861 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4862 @end ifset
4863 @ifclear GENERIC
4864 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4865 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4866 in @sc{ieee} format.
4867 @end ifset
4868 @end ifclear
4869
4870 @node Func
4871 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4872 @cindex @code{func} directive
4873 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4874 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4875 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4876 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4877 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4878 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4879 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4880 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4881
4882 @node Global
4883 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4884
4885 @cindex @code{global} directive
4886 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4887 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4888 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4889 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4890 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4891 from another file linked into the same program.
4892
4893 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4894 compatibility with other assemblers.
4895
4896 @ifset HPPA
4897 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4898 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4899 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4900 @end ifset
4901
4902 @ifset ELF
4903 @node Gnu_attribute
4904 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4905 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4906
4907 @node Hidden
4908 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4909
4910 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4911 @cindex visibility
4912 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4913 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4914 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4915
4916 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4917 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4918 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4919 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4920 @end ifset
4921
4922 @node hword
4923 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4924
4925 @cindex @code{hword} directive
4926 @cindex integers, 16-bit
4927 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
4928 @cindex sixteen bit integers
4929 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4930 a 16 bit number for each.
4931
4932 @ifset GENERIC
4933 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4934 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4935 @end ifset
4936 @ifclear GENERIC
4937 @ifset W32
4938 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4939 @end ifset
4940 @ifset W16
4941 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4942 @end ifset
4943 @end ifclear
4944
4945 @node Ident
4946 @section @code{.ident}
4947
4948 @cindex @code{ident} directive
4949
4950 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
4951 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
4952 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4953 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4954 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4955 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
4956 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4957
4958 @node If
4959 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4960
4961 @cindex conditional assembly
4962 @cindex @code{if} directive
4963 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4964 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4965 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
4966 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4967 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4968 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4969 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4970 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4971
4972 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4973 @table @code
4974 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4975 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4976 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4977 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4978 is considered to be undefined.
4979
4980 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
4981 @item .ifb @var{text}
4982 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4983
4984 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
4985 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4986 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
4987 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
4988 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4989 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
4990 string comparison is case sensitive.
4991
4992 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4993 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4994 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4995
4996 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4997 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4998 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4999
5000 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5001 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5002 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5003 equal to zero.
5004
5005 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5006 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5007 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5008
5009 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5010 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5011 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5012 to zero.
5013
5014 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5015 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5016 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5017
5018 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5019 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5020 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5021 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5022
5023 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5024 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5025 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5026 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5027
5028 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5029 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5030 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5031 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5032 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5033 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5034 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5035
5036 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5037 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5038 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5039 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5040
5041 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5042 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5043 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5044 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5045 @end table
5046
5047 @node Incbin
5048 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5049
5050 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5051 @cindex binary files, including
5052 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5053 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5054 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5055 around @var{file}.
5056
5057 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5058 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5059 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5060 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5061 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5062
5063 @node Include
5064 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5065
5066 @cindex @code{include} directive
5067 @cindex supporting files, including
5068 @cindex files, including
5069 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5070 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5071 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5072 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5073 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5074 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5075 around @var{file}.
5076
5077 @node Int
5078 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5079
5080 @cindex @code{int} directive
5081 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5082 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5083 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5084 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5085 of target the assembly is for.
5086
5087 @ifclear GENERIC
5088 @ifset H8
5089 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5090 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5091 32-bit integers.
5092 @end ifset
5093 @end ifclear
5094
5095 @ifset ELF
5096 @node Internal
5097 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5098
5099 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5100 @cindex visibility
5101 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5102 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5103 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5104
5105 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5106 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5107 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5108 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5109 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5110 @end ifset
5111
5112 @node Irp
5113 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5114
5115 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5116 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5117 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5118 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5119 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5120 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5121 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5122 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5123
5124 For example, assembling
5125
5126 @example
5127 .irp param,1,2,3
5128 move d\param,sp@@-
5129 .endr
5130 @end example
5131
5132 is equivalent to assembling
5133
5134 @example
5135 move d1,sp@@-
5136 move d2,sp@@-
5137 move d3,sp@@-
5138 @end example
5139
5140 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5141
5142 @node Irpc
5143 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5144
5145 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5146 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5147 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5148 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5149 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5150 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5151 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5152 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5153
5154 For example, assembling
5155
5156 @example
5157 .irpc param,123
5158 move d\param,sp@@-
5159 .endr
5160 @end example
5161
5162 is equivalent to assembling
5163
5164 @example
5165 move d1,sp@@-
5166 move d2,sp@@-
5167 move d3,sp@@-
5168 @end example
5169
5170 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5171 at @xref{Macro}.
5172
5173 @node Lcomm
5174 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5175
5176 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5177 @cindex local common symbols
5178 @cindex symbols, local common
5179 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5180 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5181 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5182 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5183 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5184 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5185
5186 @ifset GENERIC
5187 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5188 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5189 @end ifset
5190
5191 @ifset HPPA
5192 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5193 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5194 @end ifset
5195
5196 @node Lflags
5197 @section @code{.lflags}
5198
5199 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5200 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5201 assemblers, but ignores it.
5202
5203 @ifclear no-line-dir
5204 @node Line
5205 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5206
5207 @cindex @code{line} directive
5208 @cindex logical line number
5209 @ifset aout-bout
5210 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5211 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5212 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5213 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5214 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5215 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5216 @end ifset
5217
5218 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5219 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5220 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5221 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5222 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5223
5224 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5225 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5226 debugging.
5227 @end ifclear
5228
5229 @node Linkonce
5230 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5231 @cindex COMDAT
5232 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5233 @cindex common sections
5234 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5235 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5236 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5237 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5238 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5239 unique.
5240
5241 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5242 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5243 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5244
5245 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5246 following strings. For example:
5247 @smallexample
5248 .linkonce same_size
5249 @end smallexample
5250 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5251
5252 @table @code
5253 @item discard
5254 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5255
5256 @item one_only
5257 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5258
5259 @item same_size
5260 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5261
5262 @item same_contents
5263 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5264 @end table
5265
5266 @node List
5267 @section @code{.list}
5268
5269 @cindex @code{list} directive
5270 @cindex listing control, turning on
5271 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5272 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5273 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5274 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5275 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5276
5277 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5278 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5279 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5280
5281 @node Ln
5282 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5283
5284 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5285 @ifclear no-line-dir
5286 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5287 @end ifclear
5288 @ifset no-line-dir
5289 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5290 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5291 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5292 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5293 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5294 @ifset BOUT
5295
5296 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5297 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5298 output format.
5299 @end ifset
5300 @end ifset
5301
5302 @node Loc
5303 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5304 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5305 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5306 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5307 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5308 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5309 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5310 the row is added.
5311
5312 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5313
5314 @table @code
5315 @item basic_block
5316 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5317 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5318
5319 @item prologue_end
5320 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5321 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5322
5323 @item epilogue_begin
5324 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5325 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5326
5327 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5328 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5329 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5330 either 0 or 1.
5331
5332 @item isa @var{value}
5333 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5334 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5335
5336 @item discriminator @var{value}
5337 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5338 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5339
5340 @end table
5341
5342 @node Loc_mark_labels
5343 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5344 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5345 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5346 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5347 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5348 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5349 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5350 this function respectively.
5351
5352 @ifset ELF
5353 @node Local
5354 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5355
5356 @cindex @code{local} directive
5357 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5358 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5359 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5360 they will be created.
5361
5362 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5363 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5364 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5365 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5366 @end ifset
5367
5368 @node Long
5369 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5370
5371 @cindex @code{long} directive
5372 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5373
5374 @ignore
5375 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5376 @c what it really ought to do
5377 @node Lsym
5378 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5379
5380 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5381 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5382 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5383 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5384 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5385 the same as the expression value:
5386 @smallexample
5387 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5388 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5389 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5390 @end smallexample
5391 @noindent
5392 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5393 @end ignore
5394
5395 @node Macro
5396 @section @code{.macro}
5397
5398 @cindex macros
5399 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5400 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5401 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5402
5403 @example
5404 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5405 .long \from
5406 .if \to-\from
5407 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5408 .endif
5409 .endm
5410 @end example
5411
5412 @noindent
5413 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5414
5415 @example
5416 .long 0
5417 .long 1
5418 .long 2
5419 .long 3
5420 .long 4
5421 .long 5
5422 @end example
5423
5424 @ftable @code
5425 @item .macro @var{macname}
5426 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5427 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5428 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5429 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5430 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5431 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5432 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5433 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5434 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5435 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5436 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5437 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5438
5439 @table @code
5440 @item .macro comm
5441 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5442 arguments.
5443
5444 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5445 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5446 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5447 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5448 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5449
5450 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5451 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5452 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5453 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5454 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5455 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5456 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5457 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5458
5459 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5460 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5461 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5462 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5463 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5464
5465 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5466 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5467 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5468
5469 @end table
5470
5471 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5472 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5473 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5474 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5475 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5476 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5477 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5478 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5479 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5480 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5481 this macro definition:
5482
5483 @example
5484 .macro label l
5485 \l:
5486 .endm
5487 @end example
5488
5489 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5490 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5491 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5492 identifier.
5493
5494 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5495 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5496 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5497 length specifier like this:
5498
5499 @example
5500 .macro opcode base length
5501 \base.\length
5502 .endm
5503 @end example
5504
5505 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5506 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5507 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5508
5509 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5510
5511 @table @code
5512 @item Insert white space
5513 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5514 solution. eg:
5515
5516 @example
5517 .macro label l
5518 \l :
5519 .endm
5520 @end example
5521
5522 @item Use @samp{\()}
5523 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5524 the following text. eg:
5525
5526 @example
5527 .macro opcode base length
5528 \base\().\length
5529 .endm
5530 @end example
5531
5532 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5533 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5534 used as a separator. eg:
5535
5536 @example
5537 .altmacro
5538 .macro label l
5539 l&:
5540 .endm
5541 @end example
5542 @end table
5543
5544 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5545 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5546 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5547
5548 @item .endm
5549 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5550 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5551
5552 @item .exitm
5553 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5554 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5555
5556 @cindex number of macros executed
5557 @cindex macros, count executed
5558 @item \@@
5559 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5560 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5561 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5562
5563 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5564 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5565 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5566 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5567 @end ftable
5568
5569 @node MRI
5570 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5571
5572 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5573 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5574 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5575 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5576 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5577 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5578
5579 @node Noaltmacro
5580 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5581 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5582
5583 @node Nolist
5584 @section @code{.nolist}
5585
5586 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5587 @cindex listing control, turning off
5588 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5589 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5590 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5591 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5592 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5593
5594 @node Octa
5595 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5596
5597 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5598 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5599 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5600 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5601 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5602 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5603
5604 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5605 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5606
5607 @node Offset
5608 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5609
5610 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5611 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5612 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5613 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5614 directive.
5615
5616 @node Org
5617 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5618
5619 @cindex @code{org} directive
5620 @cindex location counter, advancing
5621 @cindex advancing location counter
5622 @cindex current address, advancing
5623 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5624 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5625 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5626 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5627 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5628 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5629 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5630 is the same as the current subsection.
5631
5632 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5633 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5634 backwards.
5635
5636 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5637 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5638 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5639 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5640 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5641 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5642
5643 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5644 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5645 people's assemblers.
5646
5647 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5648 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5649 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5650 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5651
5652 @node P2align
5653 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5654
5655 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5656 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5657 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5658 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5659 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5660 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5661 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5662 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5663
5664 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5665 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5666 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5667 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5668 with no-op instructions.
5669
5670 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5671 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5672 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5673 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5674 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5675 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5676 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5677
5678 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5679 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5680 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5681 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5682 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5683 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5684 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5685 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5686 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5687 undefined.
5688
5689 @ifset ELF
5690 @node PopSection
5691 @section @code{.popsection}
5692
5693 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5694 @cindex Section Stack
5695 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5696 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5697 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5698 (@pxref{Previous}).
5699
5700 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5701 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5702 stack.
5703 @end ifset
5704
5705 @ifset ELF
5706 @node Previous
5707 @section @code{.previous}
5708
5709 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5710 @cindex Section Stack
5711 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5712 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5713 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5714 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5715
5716 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5717 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5718 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5719 subsections). For example:
5720
5721 @smallexample
5722 .section A
5723 .subsection 1
5724 .word 0x1234
5725 .subsection 2
5726 .word 0x5678
5727 .previous
5728 .word 0x9abc
5729 @end smallexample
5730
5731 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5732 section A. Whilst:
5733
5734 @smallexample
5735 .section A
5736 .subsection 1
5737 # Now in section A subsection 1
5738 .word 0x1234
5739 .section B
5740 .subsection 0
5741 # Now in section B subsection 0
5742 .word 0x5678
5743 .subsection 1
5744 # Now in section B subsection 1
5745 .word 0x9abc
5746 .previous
5747 # Now in section B subsection 0
5748 .word 0xdef0
5749 @end smallexample
5750
5751 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5752 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5753
5754 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5755 the top section on the section stack.
5756 @end ifset
5757
5758 @node Print
5759 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5760
5761 @cindex @code{print} directive
5762 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5763 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5764
5765 @ifset ELF
5766 @node Protected
5767 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5768
5769 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5770 @cindex visibility
5771 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5772 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5773
5774 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5775 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5776 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5777 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5778 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5779 this.
5780 @end ifset
5781
5782 @node Psize
5783 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5784
5785 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5786 @cindex listing control: paper size
5787 @cindex paper size, for listings
5788 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5789 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5790
5791 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5792 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5793 default width is 200 columns.
5794
5795 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5796 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5797 @code{.eject}).
5798
5799 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5800 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5801
5802 @node Purgem
5803 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5804
5805 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5806 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5807 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5808
5809 @ifset ELF
5810 @node PushSection
5811 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5812
5813 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5814 @cindex Section Stack
5815 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5816 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5817 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5818 (@pxref{Previous}).
5819
5820 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5821 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5822 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5823 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5824 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5825 @end ifset
5826
5827 @node Quad
5828 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5829
5830 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5831 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5832 each bignum, it emits
5833 @ifclear bignum-16
5834 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5835 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5836 @cindex eight-byte integer
5837 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5838
5839 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5840 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5841 @end ifclear
5842 @ifset bignum-16
5843 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5844 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5845 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5846 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5847 @end ifset
5848
5849 @node Reloc
5850 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5851
5852 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5853 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5854 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5855 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5856 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5857 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5858 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5859 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5860 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5861 section.
5862
5863 @node Rept
5864 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5865
5866 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5867 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5868 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5869
5870 For example, assembling
5871
5872 @example
5873 .rept 3
5874 .long 0
5875 .endr
5876 @end example
5877
5878 is equivalent to assembling
5879
5880 @example
5881 .long 0
5882 .long 0
5883 .long 0
5884 @end example
5885
5886 @node Sbttl
5887 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5888
5889 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5890 @cindex subtitles for listings
5891 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5892 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5893 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5894
5895 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5896 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5897
5898 @ifset COFF
5899 @node Scl
5900 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5901
5902 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5903 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5904 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5905 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5906 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5907 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5908 symbolic debugging information.
5909 @ifset BOUT
5910
5911 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5912 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5913 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5914 @end ifset
5915 @end ifset
5916
5917 @ifset COFF-ELF
5918 @node Section
5919 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
5920
5921 @cindex named section
5922 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5923 named @var{name}.
5924
5925 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5926 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5927 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5928
5929 @ifset COFF
5930 @ifset ELF
5931 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5932 @subheading COFF Version
5933 @end ifset
5934
5935 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5936 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5937 ways:
5938
5939 @smallexample
5940 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5941 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5942 @end smallexample
5943
5944 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5945 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
5946 @table @code
5947 @item b
5948 bss section (uninitialized data)
5949 @item n
5950 section is not loaded
5951 @item w
5952 writable section
5953 @item d
5954 data section
5955 @item e
5956 exclude section from linking
5957 @item r
5958 read-only section
5959 @item x
5960 executable section
5961 @item s
5962 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5963 @item a
5964 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5965 @item y
5966 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5967 @item 0-9
5968 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5969 @end table
5970
5971 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
5972 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5973 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5974 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5975 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5976
5977 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5978 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5979 @end ifset
5980
5981 @ifset ELF
5982 @ifset COFF
5983 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5984 @subheading ELF Version
5985 @end ifset
5986
5987 @cindex Section Stack
5988 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5989 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5990 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5991 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5992
5993 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5994 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5995
5996 @smallexample
5997 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5998 @end smallexample
5999
6000 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6001 combination of the following characters:
6002 @table @code
6003 @item a
6004 section is allocatable
6005 @item e
6006 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6007 @item w
6008 section is writable
6009 @item x
6010 section is executable
6011 @item M
6012 section is mergeable
6013 @item S
6014 section contains zero terminated strings
6015 @item G
6016 section is a member of a section group
6017 @item T
6018 section is used for thread-local-storage
6019 @item ?
6020 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6021 @end table
6022
6023 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6024 @table @code
6025 @item @@progbits
6026 section contains data
6027 @item @@nobits
6028 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6029 @item @@note
6030 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6031 @item @@init_array
6032 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6033 @item @@fini_array
6034 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6035 @item @@preinit_array
6036 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6037 @end table
6038
6039 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6040
6041 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6042 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6043 @code{%} character.
6044
6045 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6046 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6047
6048 @smallexample
6049 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6050 @end smallexample
6051
6052 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6053 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6054 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6055 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6056 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6057 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6058 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6059 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6060 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6061
6062 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6063 be present along with an additional field like this:
6064
6065 @smallexample
6066 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6067 @end smallexample
6068
6069 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6070 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6071 @table @code
6072 @item comdat
6073 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6074 @item .gnu.linkonce
6075 an alias for comdat
6076 @end table
6077
6078 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6079 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6080
6081 @smallexample
6082 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6083 @end smallexample
6084
6085 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6086 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6087 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6088 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6089 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6090 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6091
6092 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6093 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6094 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6095 executable. The section will contain data.
6096
6097 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6098 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6099
6100 @smallexample
6101 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6102 @end smallexample
6103
6104 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6105 separated flags:
6106 @table @code
6107 @item #alloc
6108 section is allocatable
6109 @item #write
6110 section is writable
6111 @item #execinstr
6112 section is executable
6113 @item #exclude
6114 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6115 @item #tls
6116 section is used for thread local storage
6117 @end table
6118
6119 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6120 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6121 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6122 work.
6123 @end ifset
6124 @end ifset
6125
6126 @node Set
6127 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6128
6129 @cindex @code{set} directive
6130 @cindex symbol value, setting
6131 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6132 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6133 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6134 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6135
6136 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6137
6138 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6139 file is the last value stored into it.
6140
6141 @ifset Z80
6142 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6143 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6144 @end ifset
6145
6146 @node Short
6147 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6148
6149 @cindex @code{short} directive
6150 @ifset GENERIC
6151 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6152 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6153
6154 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6155 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6156 @end ifset
6157 @ifclear GENERIC
6158 @ifset W16
6159 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6160 @end ifset
6161 @ifset W32
6162 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6163 a 16 bit number for each.
6164 @end ifset
6165 @end ifclear
6166
6167 @node Single
6168 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6169
6170 @cindex @code{single} directive
6171 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6172 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6173 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6174 @ifset GENERIC
6175 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6176 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6177 @end ifset
6178 @ifclear GENERIC
6179 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6180 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6181 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6182 @end ifset
6183 @end ifclear
6184
6185 @ifset COFF-ELF
6186 @node Size
6187 @section @code{.size}
6188
6189 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6190
6191 @ifset COFF
6192 @ifset ELF
6193 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6194 @subheading COFF Version
6195 @end ifset
6196
6197 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6198 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6199 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6200
6201 @smallexample
6202 .size @var{expression}
6203 @end smallexample
6204
6205 @ifset BOUT
6206 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6207 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6208 ignores it.
6209 @end ifset
6210 @end ifset
6211
6212 @ifset ELF
6213 @ifset COFF
6214 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6215 @subheading ELF Version
6216 @end ifset
6217
6218 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6219 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6220
6221 @smallexample
6222 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6223 @end smallexample
6224
6225 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6226 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6227 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6228 symbols.
6229 @end ifset
6230 @end ifset
6231
6232 @ifclear no-space-dir
6233 @node Skip
6234 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6235
6236 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6237 @cindex filling memory
6238 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6239 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6240 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6241 @samp{.space}.
6242 @end ifclear
6243
6244 @node Sleb128
6245 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6246
6247 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6248 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6249 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6250 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6251
6252 @ifclear no-space-dir
6253 @node Space
6254 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6255
6256 @cindex @code{space} directive
6257 @cindex filling memory
6258 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6259 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6260 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6261 as @samp{.skip}.
6262
6263 @ifset HPPA
6264 @quotation
6265 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6266 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6267 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6268 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6269 for a summary.
6270 @end quotation
6271 @end ifset
6272 @end ifclear
6273
6274 @ifset have-stabs
6275 @node Stab
6276 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6277
6278 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6279 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6280 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6281 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6282 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6283 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6284 Up to five fields are required:
6285
6286 @table @var
6287 @item string
6288 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6289 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6290 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6291 using this field.
6292
6293 @item type
6294 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6295 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6296 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6297
6298 @item other
6299 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6300 low 8 bits of this expression.
6301
6302 @item desc
6303 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6304 bits of this expression.
6305
6306 @item value
6307 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6308 @end table
6309
6310 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6311 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6312 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6313 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6314
6315 @table @code
6316 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6317 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6318
6319 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6320 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6321 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6322 strings.
6323
6324 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6325 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6326 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6327 assembled.
6328
6329 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6330 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6331 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6332
6333 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6334 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6335 All five fields are specified.
6336 @end table
6337 @end ifset
6338 @c end have-stabs
6339
6340 @node String
6341 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6342 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6343
6344 @cindex string, copying to object file
6345 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6346 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6347 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6348 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6349 @cindex @code{string} directive
6350 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6351 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6352 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6353 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6354
6355 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6356 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6357 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6358 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6359
6360 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6361 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6362 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6363 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6364
6365 Example:
6366 @smallexample
6367 .string32 "BYE"
6368 expands to:
6369 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6370 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6371 @end smallexample
6372
6373
6374 @node Struct
6375 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6376
6377 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6378 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6379 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6380 @smallexample
6381 .struct 0
6382 field1:
6383 .struct field1 + 4
6384 field2:
6385 .struct field2 + 4
6386 field3:
6387 @end smallexample
6388 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6389 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6390 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6391 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6392 before further assembly.
6393
6394 @ifset ELF
6395 @node SubSection
6396 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6397
6398 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6399 @cindex Section Stack
6400 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6401 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6402 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6403 (@pxref{Previous}).
6404
6405 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6406 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6407 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6408 @end ifset
6409
6410 @ifset ELF
6411 @node Symver
6412 @section @code{.symver}
6413 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6414 @cindex symbol versioning
6415 @cindex versions of symbols
6416 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6417 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6418 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6419 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6420 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6421 shared library.
6422
6423 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6424 @smallexample
6425 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6426 @end smallexample
6427 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6428 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6429 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6430 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6431 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6432 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6433 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6434 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6435 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6436 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6437 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6438 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6439 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6440 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6441
6442 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6443 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6444 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6445 symbol table.
6446
6447 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6448 @smallexample
6449 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6450 @end smallexample
6451 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6452 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6453 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6454 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6455
6456 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6457 @smallexample
6458 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6459 @end smallexample
6460 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6461 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6462 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6463 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6464 @end ifset
6465
6466 @ifset COFF
6467 @node Tag
6468 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6469
6470 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6471 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6472 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6473 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6474 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6475 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6476 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6477 @ifset BOUT
6478
6479 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6480 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6481 ignores it.
6482 @end ifset
6483 @end ifset
6484
6485 @node Text
6486 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6487
6488 @cindex @code{text} directive
6489 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6490 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6491 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6492 is used.
6493
6494 @node Title
6495 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6496
6497 @cindex @code{title} directive
6498 @cindex listing control: title line
6499 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6500 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6501
6502 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6503 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6504
6505 @ifset COFF-ELF
6506 @node Type
6507 @section @code{.type}
6508
6509 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6510
6511 @ifset COFF
6512 @ifset ELF
6513 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6514 @subheading COFF Version
6515 @end ifset
6516
6517 @cindex COFF symbol type
6518 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6519 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6520 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6521 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6522
6523 @smallexample
6524 .type @var{int}
6525 @end smallexample
6526
6527 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6528 entry.
6529
6530 @ifset BOUT
6531 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6532 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6533 directive but ignores it.
6534 @end ifset
6535 @end ifset
6536
6537 @ifset ELF
6538 @ifset COFF
6539 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6540 @subheading ELF Version
6541 @end ifset
6542
6543 @cindex ELF symbol type
6544 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6545 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6546 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6547
6548 @smallexample
6549 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6550 @end smallexample
6551
6552 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6553 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6554 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6555 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6556
6557 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6558 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6559 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6560 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6561 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6562 assemblers.
6563
6564 The syntaxes supported are:
6565
6566 @smallexample
6567 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6568 .type <name>,#<type>
6569 .type <name>,@@<type>
6570 .type <name>,%<type>
6571 .type <name>,"<type>"
6572 @end smallexample
6573
6574 The types supported are:
6575
6576 @table @gcctabopt
6577 @item STT_FUNC
6578 @itemx function
6579 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6580
6581 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6582 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6583 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6584 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6585
6586 @item STT_OBJECT
6587 @itemx object
6588 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6589
6590 @item STT_TLS
6591 @itemx tls_object
6592 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6593
6594 @item STT_COMMON
6595 @itemx common
6596 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6597
6598 @item STT_NOTYPE
6599 @itemx notype
6600 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6601
6602 @item gnu_unique_object
6603 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6604 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6605 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6606 systems).
6607
6608 @end table
6609
6610 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6611
6612 @end ifset
6613 @end ifset
6614
6615 @node Uleb128
6616 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6617
6618 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6619 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6620 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6621 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6622
6623 @ifset COFF
6624 @node Val
6625 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6626
6627 @cindex @code{val} directive
6628 @cindex COFF value attribute
6629 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6630 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6631 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6632 entry.
6633 @ifset BOUT
6634
6635 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6636 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6637 @end ifset
6638 @end ifset
6639
6640 @ifset ELF
6641 @node Version
6642 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6643
6644 @cindex @code{version} directive
6645 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6646 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6647 @end ifset
6648
6649 @ifset ELF
6650 @node VTableEntry
6651 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6652
6653 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6654 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6655 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6656
6657 @node VTableInherit
6658 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6659
6660 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6661 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6662 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6663 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6664 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6665 @end ifset
6666
6667 @node Warning
6668 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6669 @cindex warning directive
6670 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6671 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6672
6673 @node Weak
6674 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6675
6676 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6677 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6678 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6679
6680 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6681 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6682 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6683
6684 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6685 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6686 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6687
6688 @node Weakref
6689 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6690
6691 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6692 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6693 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6694 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6695 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6696 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6697
6698 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6699 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6700 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6701 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6702 had the references to the alias removed.
6703
6704 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6705 within the assembler.
6706
6707 @node Word
6708 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6709
6710 @cindex @code{word} directive
6711 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6712 separated by commas.
6713 @ifclear GENERIC
6714 @ifset W32
6715 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6716 @end ifset
6717 @ifset W16
6718 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6719 @end ifset
6720 @end ifclear
6721 @ifset GENERIC
6722
6723 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6724 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6725 @end ifset
6726
6727 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6728 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6729 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6730 @cindex difference tables altered
6731 @cindex altered difference tables
6732 @quotation
6733 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6734 @end quotation
6735
6736 @ifset GENERIC
6737 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6738 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6739 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6740 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6741
6742 @end ifset
6743 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6744 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6745 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6746 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6747 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6748 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6749 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6750 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6751 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6752 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6753 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6754 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6755 @code{sym2}.
6756
6757 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6758 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6759 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6760 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6761 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6762 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6763 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6764
6765 @ifset INTERNALS
6766 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6767 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6768 assembly language programmers.
6769 @end ifset
6770 @end ifset
6771 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6772
6773 @node Deprecated
6774 @section Deprecated Directives
6775
6776 @cindex deprecated directives
6777 @cindex obsolescent directives
6778 One day these directives won't work.
6779 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6780 @table @t
6781 @item .abort
6782 @item .line
6783 @end table
6784
6785 @ifset ELF
6786 @node Object Attributes
6787 @chapter Object Attributes
6788 @cindex object attributes
6789
6790 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6791 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6792 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6793 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6794 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6795 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6796 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6797 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6798 newer generation at run-time.
6799
6800 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6801 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6802 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6803 correctly.
6804
6805 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6806 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6807 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6808 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6809 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6810 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6811
6812 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6813 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6814
6815 @menu
6816 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6817 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6818 @end menu
6819
6820 @node GNU Object Attributes
6821 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6822
6823 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6824 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6825
6826 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6827 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6828 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6829 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6830 architecture-dependent ones.
6831
6832 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6833
6834 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6835
6836 @table @r
6837 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6838 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6839 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6840 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6841 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6842 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6843 @end table
6844
6845 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6846
6847 @table @r
6848 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6849 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6850
6851 @itemize @bullet
6852 @item
6853 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6854 @item
6855 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6856 FPU.
6857 @item
6858 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6859 @item
6860 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6861 @item
6862 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6863 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6864 purpose registers.
6865 @end itemize
6866 @end table
6867
6868 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6869
6870 @table @r
6871 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6872 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6873
6874 @itemize @bullet
6875 @item
6876 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6877 @item
6878 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6879 @item
6880 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6881 @item
6882 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6883 @end itemize
6884
6885 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6886 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6887
6888 @itemize @bullet
6889 @item
6890 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6891 @item
6892 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6893 @item
6894 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6895 @item
6896 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6897 @end itemize
6898 @end table
6899
6900 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6901 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6902
6903 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6904 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6905 mailing list.
6906
6907 @itemize @bullet
6908 @item
6909 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6910 @item
6911 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6912 @item
6913 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6914 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6915 @item
6916 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6917 @item
6918 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6919 @item
6920 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6921 @end itemize
6922
6923 @end ifset
6924
6925 @ifset GENERIC
6926 @node Machine Dependencies
6927 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6928
6929 @cindex machine dependencies
6930 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6931 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
6932 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6933 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6934 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
6935 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6936 optimization.
6937
6938 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6939 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
6940 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6941
6942 @menu
6943 @ifset AARCH64
6944 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
6945 @end ifset
6946 @ifset ALPHA
6947 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
6948 @end ifset
6949 @ifset ARC
6950 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
6951 @end ifset
6952 @ifset ARM
6953 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
6954 @end ifset
6955 @ifset AVR
6956 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
6957 @end ifset
6958 @ifset Blackfin
6959 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
6960 @end ifset
6961 @ifset CR16
6962 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
6963 @end ifset
6964 @ifset CRIS
6965 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
6966 @end ifset
6967 @ifset D10V
6968 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
6969 @end ifset
6970 @ifset D30V
6971 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
6972 @end ifset
6973 @ifset EPIPHANY
6974 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
6975 @end ifset
6976 @ifset H8/300
6977 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6978 @end ifset
6979 @ifset HPPA
6980 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
6981 @end ifset
6982 @ifset I370
6983 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6984 @end ifset
6985 @ifset I80386
6986 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6987 @end ifset
6988 @ifset I860
6989 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6990 @end ifset
6991 @ifset I960
6992 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6993 @end ifset
6994 @ifset IA64
6995 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6996 @end ifset
6997 @ifset IP2K
6998 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
6999 @end ifset
7000 @ifset LM32
7001 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7002 @end ifset
7003 @ifset M32C
7004 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7005 @end ifset
7006 @ifset M32R
7007 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7008 @end ifset
7009 @ifset M680X0
7010 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7011 @end ifset
7012 @ifset M68HC11
7013 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7014 @end ifset
7015 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7016 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7017 @end ifset
7018 @ifset MIPS
7019 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7020 @end ifset
7021 @ifset MMIX
7022 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7023 @end ifset
7024 @ifset MSP430
7025 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7026 @end ifset
7027 @ifset NS32K
7028 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7029 @end ifset
7030 @ifset SH
7031 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7032 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7033 @end ifset
7034 @ifset PDP11
7035 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7036 @end ifset
7037 @ifset PJ
7038 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7039 @end ifset
7040 @ifset PPC
7041 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7042 @end ifset
7043 @ifset RL78
7044 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7045 @end ifset
7046 @ifset RX
7047 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7048 @end ifset
7049 @ifset S390
7050 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7051 @end ifset
7052 @ifset SCORE
7053 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7054 @end ifset
7055 @ifset SPARC
7056 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7057 @end ifset
7058 @ifset TIC54X
7059 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7060 @end ifset
7061 @ifset TIC6X
7062 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7063 @end ifset
7064 @ifset TILEGX
7065 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7066 @end ifset
7067 @ifset TILEPRO
7068 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7069 @end ifset
7070 @ifset V850
7071 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7072 @end ifset
7073 @ifset XGATE
7074 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7075 @end ifset
7076 @ifset XSTORMY16
7077 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7078 @end ifset
7079 @ifset XTENSA
7080 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7081 @end ifset
7082 @ifset Z80
7083 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7084 @end ifset
7085 @ifset Z8000
7086 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7087 @end ifset
7088 @ifset VAX
7089 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7090 @end ifset
7091 @end menu
7092
7093 @lowersections
7094 @end ifset
7095
7096 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7097 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7098 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7099 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7100 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7101 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7102 @c in both conditional blocks.
7103
7104 @ifset AARCH64
7105 @include c-aarch64.texi
7106 @end ifset
7107
7108 @ifset ALPHA
7109 @include c-alpha.texi
7110 @end ifset
7111
7112 @ifset ARC
7113 @include c-arc.texi
7114 @end ifset
7115
7116 @ifset ARM
7117 @include c-arm.texi
7118 @end ifset
7119
7120 @ifset AVR
7121 @include c-avr.texi
7122 @end ifset
7123
7124 @ifset Blackfin
7125 @include c-bfin.texi
7126 @end ifset
7127
7128 @ifset CR16
7129 @include c-cr16.texi
7130 @end ifset
7131
7132 @ifset CRIS
7133 @include c-cris.texi
7134 @end ifset
7135
7136 @ifset Renesas-all
7137 @ifclear GENERIC
7138 @node Machine Dependencies
7139 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7140
7141 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7142 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7143 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7144 family.
7145
7146 @menu
7147 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7148 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7149 @end menu
7150 @lowersections
7151 @end ifclear
7152 @end ifset
7153
7154 @ifset D10V
7155 @include c-d10v.texi
7156 @end ifset
7157
7158 @ifset D30V
7159 @include c-d30v.texi
7160 @end ifset
7161
7162 @ifset EPIPHANY
7163 @include c-epiphany.texi
7164 @end ifset
7165
7166 @ifset H8/300
7167 @include c-h8300.texi
7168 @end ifset
7169
7170 @ifset HPPA
7171 @include c-hppa.texi
7172 @end ifset
7173
7174 @ifset I370
7175 @include c-i370.texi
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset I80386
7179 @include c-i386.texi
7180 @end ifset
7181
7182 @ifset I860
7183 @include c-i860.texi
7184 @end ifset
7185
7186 @ifset I960
7187 @include c-i960.texi
7188 @end ifset
7189
7190 @ifset IA64
7191 @include c-ia64.texi
7192 @end ifset
7193
7194 @ifset IP2K
7195 @include c-ip2k.texi
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset LM32
7199 @include c-lm32.texi
7200 @end ifset
7201
7202 @ifset M32C
7203 @include c-m32c.texi
7204 @end ifset
7205
7206 @ifset M32R
7207 @include c-m32r.texi
7208 @end ifset
7209
7210 @ifset M680X0
7211 @include c-m68k.texi
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset M68HC11
7215 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7216 @end ifset
7217
7218 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7219 @include c-microblaze.texi
7220 @end ifset
7221
7222 @ifset MIPS
7223 @include c-mips.texi
7224 @end ifset
7225
7226 @ifset MMIX
7227 @include c-mmix.texi
7228 @end ifset
7229
7230 @ifset MSP430
7231 @include c-msp430.texi
7232 @end ifset
7233
7234 @ifset NS32K
7235 @include c-ns32k.texi
7236 @end ifset
7237
7238 @ifset PDP11
7239 @include c-pdp11.texi
7240 @end ifset
7241
7242 @ifset PJ
7243 @include c-pj.texi
7244 @end ifset
7245
7246 @ifset PPC
7247 @include c-ppc.texi
7248 @end ifset
7249
7250 @ifset RL78
7251 @include c-rl78.texi
7252 @end ifset
7253
7254 @ifset RX
7255 @include c-rx.texi
7256 @end ifset
7257
7258 @ifset S390
7259 @include c-s390.texi
7260 @end ifset
7261
7262 @ifset SCORE
7263 @include c-score.texi
7264 @end ifset
7265
7266 @ifset SH
7267 @include c-sh.texi
7268 @include c-sh64.texi
7269 @end ifset
7270
7271 @ifset SPARC
7272 @include c-sparc.texi
7273 @end ifset
7274
7275 @ifset TIC54X
7276 @include c-tic54x.texi
7277 @end ifset
7278
7279 @ifset TIC6X
7280 @include c-tic6x.texi
7281 @end ifset
7282
7283 @ifset TILEGX
7284 @include c-tilegx.texi
7285 @end ifset
7286
7287 @ifset TILEPRO
7288 @include c-tilepro.texi
7289 @end ifset
7290
7291 @ifset Z80
7292 @include c-z80.texi
7293 @end ifset
7294
7295 @ifset Z8000
7296 @include c-z8k.texi
7297 @end ifset
7298
7299 @ifset VAX
7300 @include c-vax.texi
7301 @end ifset
7302
7303 @ifset V850
7304 @include c-v850.texi
7305 @end ifset
7306
7307 @ifset XGATE
7308 @include c-xgate.texi
7309 @end ifset
7310
7311 @ifset XSTORMY16
7312 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7313 @end ifset
7314
7315 @ifset XTENSA
7316 @include c-xtensa.texi
7317 @end ifset
7318
7319 @ifset GENERIC
7320 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7321 @raisesections
7322 @end ifset
7323
7324 @node Reporting Bugs
7325 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7326 @cindex bugs in assembler
7327 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7328
7329 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7330
7331 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7332 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7333 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7334 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7335
7336 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7337 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7338
7339 @menu
7340 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7341 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7342 @end menu
7343
7344 @node Bug Criteria
7345 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7346 @cindex bug criteria
7347
7348 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7349
7350 @itemize @bullet
7351 @cindex fatal signal
7352 @cindex assembler crash
7353 @cindex crash of assembler
7354 @item
7355 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7356 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7357
7358 @cindex error on valid input
7359 @item
7360 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7361
7362 @cindex invalid input
7363 @item
7364 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7365 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7366 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7367
7368 @item
7369 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7370 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7371 @end itemize
7372
7373 @node Bug Reporting
7374 @section How to Report Bugs
7375 @cindex bug reports
7376 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7377
7378 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7379 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7380 contact that organization first.
7381
7382 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7383 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7384 distribution.
7385
7386 @ifset BUGURL
7387 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7388 to @value{BUGURL}.
7389 @end ifset
7390
7391 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7392 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7393 fact or leave it out, state it!
7394
7395 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7396 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7397 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7398 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7399 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7400 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7401 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7402 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7403 and the most helpful.
7404
7405 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7406 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7407 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7408
7409 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7410 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7411 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7412 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7413
7414 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7415
7416 @itemize @bullet
7417 @item
7418 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7419 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7420
7421 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7422 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7423
7424 @item
7425 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7426
7427 @item
7428 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7429 version number.
7430
7431 @item
7432 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7433 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7434
7435 @item
7436 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7437 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7438 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7439
7440 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7441 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7442
7443 @item
7444 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7445 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7446 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7447 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7448 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7449 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7450 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7451
7452 @item
7453 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7454 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7455
7456 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7457 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7458 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7459 make a mistake.
7460
7461 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7462 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7463 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7464 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7465 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7466 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7467 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7468 observations.
7469
7470 @item
7471 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7472 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7473 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7474 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7475 by line number.
7476
7477 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7478 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7479 @end itemize
7480
7481 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7482
7483 @itemize @bullet
7484 @item
7485 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7486
7487 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7488 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7489 changes will not affect it.
7490
7491 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7492 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7493 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7494 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7495
7496 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7497 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7498 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7499 less time, and so on.
7500
7501 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7502 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7503
7504 @item
7505 A patch for the bug.
7506
7507 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7508 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7509 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7510 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7511
7512 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7513 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7514 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7515 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7516
7517 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7518 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7519 help us to understand.
7520
7521 @item
7522 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7523
7524 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7525 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7526 @end itemize
7527
7528 @node Acknowledgements
7529 @chapter Acknowledgements
7530
7531 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7532 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7533 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7534 @c (October 2012),
7535 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7536
7537 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7538 more details?}
7539
7540 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7541 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7542 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7543
7544 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7545 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7546 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7547 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7548 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7549 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7550 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7551 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7552 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7553 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7554
7555 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7556 in format-specific I/O modules.
7557
7558 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7559 has done much work with it since.
7560
7561 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7562
7563 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7564
7565 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7566 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7567
7568 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7569 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7570 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7571 support a.out format.
7572
7573 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7574 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7575 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7576 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7577 targets.
7578
7579 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7580 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7581 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7582 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7583 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7584 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7585 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7586
7587 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7588 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7589 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7590 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7591
7592 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7593
7594 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7595
7596 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7597 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7598 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7599 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7600
7601 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7602 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7603 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7604 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7605 and some initial 64-bit support).
7606
7607 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7608
7609 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7610 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7611
7612 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7613 flavors.
7614
7615 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7616 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7617
7618 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7619 configuration enhancements.
7620
7621 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7622
7623 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7624 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7625 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7626 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7627
7628 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7629 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7630 @include fdl.texi
7631
7632 @node AS Index
7633 @unnumbered AS Index
7634
7635 @printindex cp
7636
7637 @bye
7638 @c Local Variables:
7639 @c fill-column: 79
7640 @c End:
This page took 0.194059 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.